JP2019005650A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a player is provided. A first winning lottery is performed with a first winning probability and a second winning lottery is performed with a second winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into a starting ball entering means 33A or the like. A lottery mode can be switched and set between a normal mode and a specific mode in which a first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode when a winning result is obtained by the first winning lottery. . When a winning result is obtained by the second lottery, the first winning probability is maintained as it is. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a performance mode set when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery, and when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the first lottery. It is possible to set the same performance mode as that set when the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode. [Selection diagram] Fig. 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, for example, a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball enters a predetermined starting entrance means provided in the game area, whether or not to generate a hit state is determined, Accordingly, when the identification information (symbol) is variably displayed on the predetermined display means and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the success / failure lottery, a winning state advantageous to the player occurs.

  In addition, there are many gaming machines that give a high probability mode (so-called probability variation mode) in which the winning probability is increased as compared with the normal mode after the end of a specific winning state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-000736 A

  In the gaming machines exemplified above, improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is:
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning / losing lottery with a first winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
A second lottery means for performing a second winning / losing lottery with a second winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
First special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched between at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means;
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A second special gaming state generating means for generating a second special gaming state that is not advantageous over the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery;
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes;
An effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means,
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, the gaming machine in which the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means includes:
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode that is set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. Production mode to be set when
The gist is that the same can be set.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
When the winning result is obtained by at least one of the two winning / no-win lotteries, the display means produces an effect during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the first special gaming state is occurring;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the second special gaming state is occurring. Its gist is that it can be set to the same thing.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a lottery result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and after the rendering mode in the display means is the same, the lottery by the first lottery means The gist of the invention is to provide information transmitting means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player when the number of times becomes equal to or more than the prescribed number.

A gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3,
Before the information is transmitted to the player by the information transmission means, the information transmission means transmits the information to the player before the information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode is issued. The gist of the present invention is to provide a second information transmission means that can be suggested.

A gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4,
It has a displacement member that can be displaced between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a winning result can be obtained in the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery lottery. Specific displacement means that the displacement member is in an open state when
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and when the displaceable member is in the open state, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. If there is, the gist is that the second information transmission means can suggest the transmission of the information by the information transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd big hit type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st hit | judging determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st jackpot classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change end time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a return process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit special prize state start process. It is a flowchart which shows a big win time variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit special prize sending process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special prize state start process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows a small winning time variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a special prize feeding process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit | end completion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the reception interruption process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a symbol. It is a figure for demonstrating a hit classification. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 2nd jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of the probability variation big hit time and the fluctuation pattern table of normal production mode. (A) is a figure which shows the storage structure of 16R probability variation big hit hour and fluctuation pattern table, (b) is a figure which shows the storage structure of 8R probability variation big hit hour and fluctuation pattern table, (c) is 2R. It is a figure which shows the storage structure of the probability variation big hit time and fluctuation pattern table, (d) is a figure which shows the storage structure of the 2R time junior college time and fluctuation pattern table, (e) is the 2R normal big hit hour or small hit It is a figure which shows the storage structure of a time and fluctuation | variation pattern table, (f) is a figure which shows the storage structure of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of back-and-forth deviation, and (g) is the time and fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach other than back and forth (H) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a completely out of time / variation pattern table. It is a figure which shows the symbol stopped and displayed at the time of 2R normal big hit or small hit. It is a figure which shows the structure of an opening / closing pattern control table. It is a figure which shows the structure of an opening command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a round open | release command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a round closure command table. It is a figure which shows the structure of an ending command table. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of an open eye command table, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of a closed eye command table. (A) is a diagram showing an effect that is performed when a win occurs in the normal effect mode and an effect mode from the next fluctuation, and (b) is an effect that is performed when a win occurs in the probability variation effect mode. It is a figure which shows the production mode from the time of the next fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the opening command, round opening command (opening eye command), round closing command (closing eye command), and ending command which are set when winning is won in each effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in normal mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect at the time of 8R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect during opening at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect during closure at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending effect at the time of 8R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the probability variation production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the stop symbol displayed in 2R probability variation big hit time etc. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the opening effect in the time of 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hit effect in the time of 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the ending effect in the time of 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the latent production mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the hit effect in the time of 2R probability variation big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the opening effect at the time of 2R junior large hit or small hit in the probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit effect at the time of 2R time junior big hit or small hit at the probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows the ending effect at the time of 2R time junior large hit or small hit in the probability variation effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus in time reduction effect mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return effect displayed in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return effect displayed in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return process suggestion effect displayed in a decoration symbol display apparatus. It is an enlarged front view which shows another example of a start winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the jackpot end setting process. It is a figure which shows another example of a variable prize apparatus, Comprising: (a) is an enlarged front view, (b), (c) is an enlarged plane perspective view. It is a figure which shows another example of a variable prize apparatus, Comprising: (a) is an enlarged front view, (b), (c) is an enlarged plane perspective view. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a small hit | end completion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special prize state start process at the time of a small hit used when performing a return process suggestion effect in a small hit effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end setting process used when performing a return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change end time setting process used when performing a return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the return process used when performing a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display etc. which are displayed in a return process lottery effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the button display etc. which are displayed in a return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows an effect button process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a small hit | end completion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a return process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the return process remaining frequency display effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a return process lottery effect. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a small hit | end completion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a return process. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed at the time of a big hit at the time of a fluctuation | variation. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect displayed at the time of a big hit at the time of a fluctuation | variation. It is a mimetic diagram showing an example of the effect displayed at the time of deviation at the time of change.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203, and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories placed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. .

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the lower center, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided. In addition, an effect button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the effect button 125, a corresponding effect is performed on a decorative symbol display device 42 described later. Or the production content is changed.

  On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball launching handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 as an operating means protruding to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as launching device) 60 as launching means, which will be described later, while being aligned in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the periphery of the window 101. Further, an error display lamp 104 that is turned on at a predetermined error is provided in a portion of the frame lamp 102 adjacent to both sides of the window 101. Note that a number of fine through holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 are formed in the frame lamp 102 above the error display lamps 104.

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached in a state in which the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

  Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), the launching device 60 as launching means and the game ball immediately after being launched from the launching device 60 are placed. A guide rail 61 for guiding is attached. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. In addition, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the launching position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device (large winning port) 32, an upper starting winning port 33A, a lower starting winning port 33B, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L and The second special display device 43R and the like are disposed in a through hole formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball wins (enters) various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning port 33A, and the lower starting winning port 33B, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to (or the lower plate 15). For example, when there is a prize at the upper start prize opening 33A, three when there is a prize at the lower start prize opening 33B, and 10 when there is a prize at the general prize opening 31 When there are winnings in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (lower plate 15). In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and the game balls that have not won the various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. .

  Here, the starting ball entering means in the present embodiment is constituted by the upper starting ball entering means 33A and the lower starting ball entering means 33B, and the upper start winning hole 33A constitutes the first starting ball entering means, and the lower start winning hole is formed. 33B constitutes a second starting entrance means. In addition, the variable winning device 32 constitutes a specific winning means.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants). As a result, the above-described winning winning openings 33A, 33B and the like are adjusted so as to occur with an appropriate probability.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a through which a game ball can be won, and a rectangular flat plate opening / closing plate 32b as an opening / closing member that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a (corresponding to the “displacement member” in the present embodiment). And a winning prize opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 32b.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won into the big winning opening 32a, but when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a big hit or a small win described later occurs, By exciting the solenoid for the mouth, the opening / closing plate 32b is tilted forward with the lower side as a rotation axis, so that the game ball is in an open state in which the prize winning opening 32a can be won.

  In the upper start winning opening 33A, game balls can always win. On the other hand, the lower start winning opening 33B is provided with an electric accessory 37 as an open / close type winning assist device.

  The electric accessory 37 includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37a serving as an opening / closing member that pivots and displaces in the left-right direction with the lower end side as an axis, and a start winning opening solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the movable blade 37a. When the movable blade 37a opens and closes in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can win the lower start winning port 33B, and the game ball cannot win the lower start winning port 33B. The state can be changed between the closed state and the closed state.

  As will be described in detail later, the first start winning switch 224A and the second start winning switch 224B are provided in the upper start winning opening 33A and the lower starting winning opening 33B, respectively, for detecting the winning game balls. When a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, a first winning / losing lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state and a second winning / notifying lottery for determining whether or not to generate a small hit state are performed. In addition, the special display devices 43L and 43R (and a decorative symbol display device 42 to be described later) are configured to perform variable display. Then, when winning in the first winning / losing lottery, a big hit state is given, and when winning in the second winning / notting lottery, a small hit state is given.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 45, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots include “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R hourly jackpot” and “2R normal jackpot”.

  In the big hit state of “16R probability variable big hit”, “long open” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). In the jackpot state of “8R probability variation jackpot”, “long open” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated eight times (8 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, “long open” means that a predetermined time of 30 seconds elapses after the open / close plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined number of the variable winning device 32 is provided. One opening / closing operation until the game is closed on condition that 10 game balls are won.

  In the big hit state of “2R probability variation big hit”, “short opening” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated twice (two rounds). Also, in “2R short jackpot” and “2R normal jackpot”, “short open” is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated twice (two rounds).

  In the present embodiment, “short opening” means that a specified time of 0.4 seconds elapses after the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 is specified. One opening / closing operation until the closed state is obtained on condition that three game balls are won.

  In the present embodiment, based on the operation of the player's handle 18, the game ball is fired from the launch device 60 toward the game area at a rate of "0.6 seconds". On the other hand, in the “short opening”, the specified opening time of the opening / closing plate 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of “short opening”, the opening time of the opening / closing plate 32b is shorter than the launching period of the game ball. Therefore, even one game ball may not win by only one “short opening”. For this reason, the opening / closing plate 32b is hardly closed based on the condition relating to the number of winning prizes (three winning prizes) among the two closing conditions corresponding to “short opening”, and the opening / closing board 32b once opened. Is normally closed based on the passage of a specified time (0.4 seconds). Thereby, in the execution period of “short opening”, it is avoided that the execution period changes each time.

  Further, when the above-mentioned “probable big hits” occur, “high probability mode (high probability state)” (corresponding to “specific mode”) is given as the lottery mode after the end of the big hit state. On the other hand, when “2R short jackpot” or “2R normal jackpot” occurs, “low probability mode (low probability state)” (corresponding to “normal mode”) is given after the jackpot state ends.

  The “high probability mode” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased as compared with the “low probability mode” set at the normal time. The “high probability mode” set after the end of the jackpot continues until the next jackpot state occurs.

  In addition, after the end of the various jackpots, the winning support mode related to the electric accessory 37 is displayed while the special display devices 43L and 43R are displayed a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. "High support mode (high pitched state)" may be given.

  In the “high support mode”, the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the electric starter 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is lower than the “low support mode (low entry state)” set at the normal time. The state that has increased.

  For example, as the “high support mode”, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than that in the “low support mode”, and (2) one time of the movable blade 37a of the electric accessory 37. A state in which the opening time (specified time) is longer than that in the “low support mode”, and (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37a is larger than in the “low support mode”. (4) When the winning result is obtained by the open lottery of the electric player 37 caused by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 34, the number of executions of the opening / closing process of the movable blade 37a performed once is “low support mode” "(5) The winning probability in the open lottery of the electric accessory 37 is higher than the winning probability in the" low support mode ". In the high support mode in the present embodiment, the configurations (1), (2), and (5) are adopted. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, game balls are likely to win frequently at the lower start winning opening 33B, and the number of times that the big win lottery is executed increases and the ball has a good state.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the “high support mode” is given, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are changed by changing a later-described variation pattern table to a table for the “high support mode”. The variable display time on the (decorative symbol display device 42) is shorter than that in the “low support mode”.

  In the present embodiment, “high support mode” is given until the next jackpot state occurs after the end of “16R probability variation jackpot” and “8R probability variation jackpot”. The “high support mode” will be referred to as “until next time / high support mode”. In addition, after the “2R probability variation jackpot” in the “high probability mode” is ended, the “until next time / high support mode” is given. Furthermore, even in the “low probability mode”, the “high support mode until next time” is also given after the end of “2R probability variation jackpot” in the “time reduction effect mode” described later. On the other hand, the “low support mode” is maintained after the end of “2R probability variation jackpot” in the “low probability mode” other than the “time reduction effect mode”.

  Further, after the “2R short junior big hit” is completed, the “high support mode” is given while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the “100 times” variable display. The “high support mode” is hereinafter referred to as “100 times / high support mode”.

  In addition, after the “2R normal jackpot” ends, “low support mode” is basically given, but after the “2R normal jackpot” ends in the “time reduction effect mode” or “probability effect mode” described later. , “100 times high support mode” is given.

  In the present embodiment, various gaming states are generated by combining the various modes.

  For example, if the “high probability mode” and the “high support mode” are given, the so-called “probability change (probability change) mode” is set. In the “probability change mode”, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 clearly indicates that the effect mode is in the probable change state, and the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is “time reduction mode” described later. There are times when it will be similar. Therefore, the “high probability mode” and the “low probability mode” may not be determined based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  If the “low probability mode” and the “low support mode” are given, the so-called “normal mode” is set. In the “normal mode”, when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the normal effect mode (“normal effect mode”), the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is “latency probability mode” to be described later. There are times when it becomes the same as the time (“latent performance mode”). Therefore, the “high probability mode” and the “low probability mode” may not be determined based on the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  If the “low probability mode” and the “100 times / high support mode” are given, a so-called “time reduction (time reduction) mode” is set.

  If the “high probability mode” and the “low support mode” are given, the so-called “latent probability (latency probability variation) mode” is set. In the “latent probability mode”, the jackpot probability is merely increased, and the surface is in a state that is not different from that in the “normal mode”. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the state in which the “high probability mode” is given.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, apart from the various “big hits”, a “small win” is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the second winning / losing lottery. In the small hit state, basically, the variable winning device 32 is opened a plurality of times [in this embodiment, a short time (for example, 0.4 seconds) similar to the above “short open”. However, when the number of game balls won for the variable prize-winning device 32 is equal to or greater than the predetermined maximum winning number M1 (10 in the present embodiment), the opening of the two is completed. Before this, the variable winning device 32 is closed. For example, when the number of balls entered into the variable winning device 32 is equal to or greater than the maximum possible winning number M1 at the first opening, the second opening is not performed and the small hit state is terminated. Also, at the second opening, when the number of game balls won for the variable winning device 32 (the total winning of the first opening and the second opening) exceeds the maximum possible number M1, the opening time at the second opening is 0. Even if it is less than 4 seconds, the variable winning device 32 is closed and the small hit state ends.

  In addition, the lottery mode and the winning support mode given after the end of the small hit state are the original modes before the small hit state occurs. For example, if the lottery mode before the small hit state occurs is the “high probability mode”, the “high probability mode” is maintained even after the small hit state ends.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, when a game ball is won in the upper start winning opening 33A and in the case of winning in the lower start winning opening 33B, it is given when it is won in the winning lottery. The distribution of jackpot type is different. When winning or failing lottery with the winning of a game ball at the top start winning opening 33A, one of “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot” and “2R normal jackpot” is selected If the winning lottery is triggered by the winning of a game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B, it is assigned to one of “16R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “2R short time big hit” Will be. Further, the “small hit” is configured to occur only when a winning / losing lottery with the winning of a game ball at the upper start winning opening 33A is won.

  The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each composed of two segment display devices, and are installed in the lower part of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by turning on and off these individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on, and The matching display segment can be lit. Thereby, a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers) is individually displayed on each segment display device.

  Then, the first special display device 43L displays a variable display when the game ball is won at the upper start winning port 33A, and the second special display device 43R is triggered when the game ball is won at the lower start winning port 33B. In this configuration, variation display is performed. Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as main control means described later. The first special display device 43L constitutes a first special display means, and the second special display device 43R constitutes a second special display means.

  In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not the big hit lottery is won is definitely displayed according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped. The For example, when a game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, the corresponding first special display device 43L displays a variable display at a high speed, and when a predetermined time elapses, one of the display modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for a few seconds). ) Then, when winning the jackpot lottery, numerical values corresponding to various jackpots are displayed when the fluctuation is stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

  For example, when “16R Probable Bonus” is won, “9-” is stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when “8R Probable Bonus” is won, the first or In the second special display devices 43L and 43R, “7−” is stopped and displayed. In addition, when “2R probable big hit” is won, “2-” is stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and when “2R short time big hit” is won, the first or “2 |” is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when “2R normal jackpot” is won, “2_” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R. . Furthermore, when “small hit” is won, “2.-” is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Here, in particular, in order to enhance the effect of “2R probability variation jackpot” in the “low probability mode”, the stop mode “2-” according to “2R probability variation jackpot” and the stop mode “2_” according to “2R normal jackpot” It is preferable that the stop mode “2.-” related to “small hit” is misleading. In particular, in order to enhance the effect of “small hit” in the “probability change mode”, the stop mode “2.-” related to “small hit” and the stop modes “2 |” and “ It is preferable that the stop mode “2_” related to “2R normal jackpot” is misleading.

  Of course, the stop mode of the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various hits is not limited to the above mode. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type instead of one. For example, when “16R probable big hit” is won, one of “91”, “92”, “93”,... Is selected and stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. It is good also as a structure to be.

  Even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one hit type, a plurality of stop modes related to “2R probability variation big hit” and “2R short-time big hit” It is preferable that the stop mode according to the above, the stop mode according to “2R normal jackpot”, and the plurality of stop modes according to “small jackpot” are misleading. For example, as a plurality of stop modes related to “2R probability variation big hit”, any one of “X-”, “X.-”, “X |”, “X_”,... (X is, for example, “1”, “2”, “3”, etc.) are stopped and displayed, and “X.−”, “X |”, “X_”, “X−”,. .. is stopped and one of “X |”, “X_”, “X-”, “X-.”,... Is stopped as a stop mode related to “2R normal jackpot” In addition, any of “X_”, “X-”, “X-.”, “X |”,... In such a configuration, “X-”, “X-.”, “X |”, “X_” are a stop mode related to “2R probability variable jackpot”, a stop mode related to “2R short-time jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” It is the structure allocated to each of the stop aspect which concerns on, and the stop aspect which concerns on a "small hit".

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can change suitably the color displayed in arbitrary or all the display segments.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is newly won in the start winning opening 33A, 33B during the variation display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variation display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display performed in. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game ball won in the upper start winning port 33A and the game ball won in the lower start winning port 33B. Corresponding to the above, up to 4 times of variation display (total 8 times of variation display) is put on hold. In addition, the number of times of holding is lit and displayed by the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning opening 33A, 33B during the big hit state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also put on hold.

  Basically, the variable display triggered by winning at the upper start winning opening 33A is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls are won at the upper starting winning opening 33A and digested in the order of winning, and the lower start winning opening is obtained. The variable display triggered by winning the prize to 33B is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have won the lower start winning opening 33B and digested in the order of winning. However, when both the variable display triggered by winning at the upper start winning port 33A and the variable display triggered by winning at the lower start winning port 33B are held (the first hold lamp 46a and the second hold lamp 46a). When one or more of the holding lamps 46b are lit up), the variable display triggered by winning at the lower start winning opening 33B is preferentially digested. In other words, unless all the variable displays triggered by winning in the lower start winning opening 33B are digested, the variable display triggered by winning in the upper start winning opening 33A is not performed. For example, in the state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, when a game ball is won in the lower start winning port 33B and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, a prize is given to the upper starting winning port 33A. The variable display that is triggered is postponed, and the variable display that is triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33B is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variation display triggered by winning at the upper start winning opening 33A is also referred to as “first variation display”, and the variation display triggered by winning at the lower start winning opening 33B is referred to as “second variation display”. Is also referred to.

  Further, the through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate 34 is electrically driven. An open lottery is performed as to whether or not the accessory 37 (the lower start winning opening 33B) is in an open state, and variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. When the winning lottery is won, the electric accessory 37 is opened for a specified time. The through gate 34 corresponds to the trigger ball means in the present embodiment. In addition, the open lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 37 (the lower start winning opening 33B) is in the open state constitutes the third winning / losing lottery in the present embodiment, and this function is implemented by the function of the main control device 261 for executing this. The third lottery means in the form is configured.

  The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that variably displays triggered by the passage of the through gate 34, and a decorative symbol display device that variably displays in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. 42 is provided. The decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes display means in the present embodiment.

  Further, the variable display device unit 35 shows a variation indicating which of the upper start winning port 33A and the lower starting winning port 33B corresponds to the variable display performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. A specific lamp 40 is provided.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured so that “○” or “×” can be lit as a normal symbol. For example, each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol is displayed as “O” → “×” → Fluctuating display at high speed such as “○” →. When the change display is stopped for a few seconds with the “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the electric accessory 37 of the lower start winning opening 33B is opened for a specified time. The display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 described later. The normal symbol display device 41 corresponds to the third display means in the present embodiment.

  In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41, the corresponding fluctuation display is performed after the end of the fluctuation display at that time. It has become. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of the variable display to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to 4 times, and the hold number is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 44. Yes.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub control device 262 and a display control device 45 as sub control means described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 supports the auxiliary design based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, and symbols (numbers) as a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially displayed in each symbol display area. After that, the symbols are displayed in a stopped manner in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area). For example, when the above-mentioned “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” is determined by the main control device 261, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R displays a display corresponding to these jackpots, and a decorative design. The symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to these jackpots on the display device 42 (for example, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and the jackpot state Is started.

  Further, when “2R probability change big hit” is confirmed, or “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” is decided in “normal effect mode” or “latent probability effect mode”, the symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The combination corresponding to these hits is stopped (for example, a special symbol that does not normally appear in the middle symbol display area (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special symbol”) is stopped) and the hit state starts. Is done. As a result, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, the player, based on the stop symbol, is more advantageous to the player “2R probability variation jackpot” and less advantageous “2R normal jackpot” And “small hit” cannot be distinguished from each other, and it can be expected that “2R probability variation big hit” will occur.

  Furthermore, “2R normal jackpot” is determined, or when the rendering mode is “probable variation mode” (in this case, the lottery mode is “high probability mode”) or “short-time rendering mode”, When “small hit” is determined, the decorative symbol display device 42 may refer to a predetermined combination of symbols corresponding to these hits (hereinafter referred to as a “prescribed symbol combination”. (For example, “2” is displayed in the upper symbol display area, “4” is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and “6” is stopped in the lower symbol display area). Is started. Therefore, based on the stop symbol, the player maintains the lottery mode with the “high probability mode” and the “2R short jackpot” and “2R normal jackpot” in which the lottery mode is switched to the “low probability mode”. Since it cannot be distinguished from “small hit” and can be expected to maintain the “high probability mode”, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's preference.

  It should be noted that the combination of symbols corresponding to the big hit or the small hit can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas in the case of “2R probable big hit”, “2R short-term big hit”, “2R normal big hit”, and “small hit” It may be configured such that the combination of specific symbols that are stopped and displayed is different, or the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be the same. . Furthermore, in the case of “2R probable big hit”, “2R short-range big hit”, “2R normal big hit”, or “small hit”, it will be stopped and displayed on the surface in a combination of random outage as well as outage. It may be.

  Further, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to “big hit” or “small hit”, as the previous step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The Rukoto. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. If the “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” or the like does not occur even when the reach state occurs, the special symbols different from the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. Symbols other than the correct symbol are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. In addition, even if the reach state occurs, it may be stopped and displayed with a symbol such as the “specified symbol”.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 42 (holding display area W3 to be described later) is configured to display the number of holdings of variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to the holding lamps 46a and 46b ( (See FIG. 59 and the like).

  Note that the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the game area that is not easily noticeable by the player, the size of the display portion is small, and the time during which the characters for determination are stopped and displayed is relatively long. short. Therefore, it is practically impossible to grasp the gaming state that can be given unless the eyes are carefully observed without special attention from the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  The variation specifying lamp 40 includes an LED having a blue emission color and an LED having a red emission color, and the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a variable display in response to winning in the upper start winning opening 33A. In this case, light is emitted in blue, and light is emitted in red when a variable display triggered by winning at the lower start winning opening 33B is performed.

  The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 42. A ball entrance 151 is provided in the upper portion of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 is formed inside the center frame 47 along the side of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the decorative symbol display device 42 via a warp channel 152 extending vertically. The game ball guided on the stage 153 falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or rolls on the stage 153 and then enters the pocket 154 formed at the center back side of the stage 153. . The pocket 154 communicates with a guide passage 155 that leads to a game area immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A, and a game ball that has entered the pocket 154 has a relatively high probability. To win a prize.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail unit 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 for guiding to the lower plate 15 is formed. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, each of the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, the control of prohibiting the launching device 60 from being launched is performed. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching device 60 is allowed to be launched.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42b in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and is fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42b). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42b and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning ports 33A, 33B and the like from the back. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have won prizes in various winning ports. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  Further, the game board 30 is provided with a winning detection switch (entrance detecting means) for detecting game balls that have won the various winning ports corresponding to various winning ports such as the general winning port 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. The upper start winning port 33A is provided with a first start winning switch 224A, and the lower start winning port 33B is provided with a second start winning switch 224B. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the prize opening switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. . The first board surface relay board relays the prize opening switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 through a cable connector.

  On the other hand, the start winning switches 224A and 224B that detect winning at the start winning ports 33A and 33B are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

  The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided in the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or high probability mode), the front frame set 14 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later, Terminals for outputting information related to opening of the frame 12, terminals for outputting information relating to various error states such as winning error, bottom pan full error, tank ball no error, payout error, and prizes paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a terminal for outputting information related to “small hit” is provided, and information on occurrence of “small hit” is output. It is good also as a structure which does not output.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a state in which a payout control device 311 as a payout control unit, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board 314 are overlapped on the back side of the lower frame set 251. It is detachably attached.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

  Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor unit, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that, if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input / output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

  In addition, for convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a prize opening switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, a through gate switch 225, Various electrical components such as various substrates are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. In addition to a RAM 553 that is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input / output port 554, a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are also provided. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, various illumination units, and the lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, “variation pattern command”) transmitted from the main control device 261, for example, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 display whether or not a big hit is made, and the like, and the sub control device 262. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. If data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power off, each register, so that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. Similarly to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a “payout permission flag” in which the payout permission of the prize ball by the payout control device 311 is set, a “command reception flag” that is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, A command buffer for storing a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is provided.

  The “payout allowance flag” is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received. It is turned off when returning to the initial setting process or before power-off. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are the “payout initialization command” for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, the “prize ball command” for instructing the payout of the prize ball, and the main control device 261. There are three “payout return commands” transmitted when power is restored.

  The “command reception flag” is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. The “command reception flag” is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when the process is restored before the power is turned off, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that it is not done, the launching device 60 is driven, and the game ball is launched at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  Note that the power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  First, the operation of the main controller 261 will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a hit random number counter C1 used for winning lottery (whether or not lottery) for determining whether or not a big hit state or a small hit state is generated, and determining a big hit type used for determining the big hit type The counter C2, the reach selection counter C3 used for determining whether or not the reach state is generated when the decorative symbol display device 42 is moved and changed, the type of reach to be generated, and the like, and the initial value of the hit random number counter C1 Random initial value counter CINI used for value setting, determination of variation display time of first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), variation pattern (effect pattern) in ornamental symbol display device 42 Fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determination of the standard symbol display device 41 and lottery of the normal symbol display apparatus 41 It is set to be used and normal symbol random number counter C4 for use in the open state to whether an open draw).

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 is provided with a special variable holding area for storing the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3, and a normal change holding area for storing the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4. It has been. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable reserved area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area.

  In each holding area of the first special variable holding area, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper start winning opening 33A. Stored. The first special variable holding area constitutes a first holding means.

  In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the lower start winning opening 33B. Stored. The second special fluctuation holding area constitutes a second holding means.

  The execution area and each holding area in the special variable holding area include a hit random number storage area for storing the value of the hit random number counter C1, a jackpot type random number storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, and a reach selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area is provided for storing the values.

  In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

  By adopting such a configuration, as described above, the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  The counters will be described in detail. The winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 398, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (ie, 398) as the closing price, 0 is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the winning random number counter buffer. The value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the winning random number counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper starting winning port 33A or the lower starting winning port 33B is changed to the first special variation holding area or the second special variation. Stored in the reserved area. Therefore, this process constitutes a part of the first winning / losing lottery and the second winning / losing lottery.

  There are two types of random number values that are jackpots, “low probability mode” and “high probability mode”. In this embodiment, the number of random number values that are jackpots in “low probability mode” is One value is “7”, and in the “high probability mode”, the number of random numbers that are jackpots is 10, and the value is “7 to 16”. In other words, in the “low probability mode”, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1/399 (a jackpot state occurs), and in the “high probability mode”, the winning lottery is won with a probability of 1 / 39.9. Become. These winning probabilities correspond to the first winning probabilities.

  In this embodiment, a jackpot determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 corresponds to a jackpot is provided for the ROM 502. In this embodiment, there are two jackpot hit determination tables, and there are a first jackpot determination table storing “7” and a second jackpot determination table storing “7-16”.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a small hit determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 corresponds to the small hit. The number of random number values that are small hits is 10, and the value is “101 to 110”. That is, the winning / losing lottery is won (a small hit state occurs) with a probability of 1 / 39.9. Such a winning probability corresponds to a second winning probability. It should be noted that the small hit / no win table is referred to only in the winning lottery resulting from the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is configured such that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 49, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (ie 49), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter C2 gives a jackpot type, that is, “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R short time jackpot” or “2R normal jackpot”. Is determined.

  The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different between the case where the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33A and the case where the game ball has won the lower start winning opening 33B. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, and the first jackpot type determination table that is considered when a game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, and the game ball goes to the lower start winning opening 33B. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is considered when winning.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 19” in consideration of the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 46). Grant of “16R probability variation jackpot” is determined. Also, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “20 to 39”, the assignment of “8R probability variation big hit” is determined. If the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “40”, “2R probability variation big hit is determined. "Is determined. Further, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “41 to 49”, the provision of “2R normal jackpot” is determined.

  In other words, when winning the jackpot lottery triggered by winning at the top start winning opening 33A, it becomes “16R-probable jackpot” with a probability of 40%, and “8R-probability jackpot” with a probability of 40%. Probability is “2R probability variation jackpot” and 18% probability is “2R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, when the game ball has won the lower start winning opening 33B, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 47) is referred to, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is “0 to 39”, “ The grant of “16R probability variation jackpot” is determined. If it is “40”, the grant of “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined, and if it is “41 to 49”, the grant of “2R short time jackpot” is determined.

  That is, when winning or failing the lottery at the lower start winning opening 33B, it will be “16R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 80% and “2R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 2%, and 18% Probability is “2R short junior hit”.

  The jackpot type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. The value of the big hit type determination counter C2 stored in the big hit type determination counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning port 33A or the lower start winning port 33B is set to a special variable holding area (first special reservation area) of the RAM 503. In the variable holding area or the second special variable holding area).

  In addition, the reach selection counter C3 is configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), the reach selection counter C3 returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the reach selection counter C3 causes a reach for the symbol, and then the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol, and the “stop off-reach reach” stops. Will draw lots of “reach other than front / rear out” and stop “complete out” where no reach occurs. In the present embodiment, a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach state and which reach corresponds to the ROM 502. Is provided. In the reach determination table, a value of “0 to 238” is stored, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the reach out of front and back, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration that corresponds to a detachment.

  The reach selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter C3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. The reach selection counter C3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is stored in the special change hold area (first special change hold) in the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A or the lower start winning opening 33B. Area or the second special variable holding area).

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 198), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 240) and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. This is also shown in FIG.

  For example, in the 16R probability variation big hit / variation pattern table (see FIG. 48) related to the “normal effect mode” (when “game state determination value Xj” described later is “1”), the first variation type counter CS1 The reach type of symbols, such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and other rough variation modes are determined, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation modes such as variation time. Therefore, diversification of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Of course, it is possible to determine the variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1.

  Note that the normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is made except for the variation of the symbols. Super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to symbols during symbol variation display (after the reach state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. Premium reach is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during a symbol variation display (after the reach state is established), in addition to the symbol, a character with a pattern different from the super reach is displayed. This is a reach pattern that is performed in a manner and thus gives the player a sense of expectation.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the decorative pattern display device 42 determines a variation pattern at the start of symbol variation.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the hit random number counter C1, the reach selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the upper limit value (that is, after reaching 9 and to the lower limit value of 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired.

  When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning (in this example, “◯”) is stopped and displayed. Then, the electric accessory 37 in the lower start winning opening 33B is opened for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, in the “low support mode”, the value of the random number to be won is one “0”. On the other hand, in the “high support mode”, the number of random numbers to be won is “0 to 7”. That is, in the “low support mode”, the electric accessory 37 is opened with a probability of 1/10, and in the “high support mode”, the electric accessory 37 is opened with a probability of 4/5. These winning probabilities correspond to the third winning probability.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interruption process, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interruption process.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. To start NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. In the figure, the timer interrupt processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is denoted by a symbol beginning with S3.

  In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, reading processing of various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the state of various winning detection switches (winning port switch 221, count switch 223, start winning switch 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 is read and the state of the switch is determined. Save the detection information.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches an upper limit value (398 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, the reach selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Thereafter, in step S304, a start winning process associated with winning in the start winning ports 33A and 33B is executed, and in step S305, a through gate passing process accompanying passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S304-1, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224B whether or not the game ball has won the lower start winning opening 33B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-1, in step S304-2, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning in the lower start winning opening 33B is the upper limit value (this implementation) In the form, it is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-9. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S304-2, the process proceeds to step S304-3, and the lower hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304-4, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2, and the reach selection counter C3 updated in the random number update process in step S303 are stored in the reserved area where the second special variable reserved area is free. Store in the first area. After step S304-4, the process proceeds to step S304-5.

  In step S304-5, a second hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Here, the details of the second hit determination process in step S304-5 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-5-1, the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area matches the value “7” corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot determination table. It is determined whether or not to do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-1, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, in step S304-5-2, the “big win winning flag” is turned on, and then the present process is terminated. The “big hit winning flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of a big hit state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-5-1, it is determined in step S304-5-3 whether the "high probability mode" is in effect based on the value of the "lottery mode flag". .

  The “lottery mode flag” is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is the “low probability mode” or the “high probability mode”. In the present embodiment, the “lottery mode flag” is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the flag value is set to “50” when the lottery mode is “low probability mode”. In the case of “probability mode”, “53” is set. Note that the value “5” of the upper 4 bits in the “lottery mode flag” is uniformly added for noise countermeasures and is not particularly used for determining the gaming state.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-3, that is, in the “high probability mode”, in step S304-5-4, a win random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is stored. Of the value corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second jackpot winning / failure determination table is determined to be any one of “8 to 16” excluding the above “7”. In the determination process, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot. In the following, the process for determining whether or not a certain value (for example, a counter value) matches any one of a plurality of values is basically described in one block in the figure. In the actual processing, similarly to the above, it is determined one by one whether a certain value matches one of a plurality of values.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-5-4, that is, if it is determined that a big hit state occurs during the “high probability mode”, the “big win winning flag” is turned on in step S304-5-2. After that, this processing is finished as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-5-3 or step S304-5-4, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-6 following step S304-5, if it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, a second special variation is newly added. Based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 stored in the reserved area, a second jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

  The second jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the second jackpot type determination process, first, in step S304-6-1, it is determined whether or not the “big hit winning flag” is set in the second hit determination process S304-5 performed immediately before, and a negative determination is made. If so, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, the type of jackpot is determined in consideration of the second jackpot type determination table.

  Specifically, in step S304-6-2, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a value “0 to 39” corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”. It is determined whether it is either. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-6-3, where the “16R probability variation big hit flag” is turned on, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-6-2, the process proceeds to step S304-6-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is “ It is determined whether or not the value is “40” corresponding to “2R probability variation big hit”. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-6-5, the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is turned on, and the present process ends.

  When a negative determination is made in step S304-6-4, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special variable suspension area is a value “41 corresponding to“ 2R short / long jackpot ”. Since it is considered to be “˜50”, the “2R short-time big hit flag” is turned on in step S304-6-6, and this processing ends.

  The “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “16R probability variation jackpot”, and the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is the state determination for determining occurrence of “2R probability variation jackpot”. This is information, and the “2R short-term jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “2R short-term jackpot”.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in the following step S304-7, when it is determined in step S304-5 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, it is newly stored in the second special variable holding area. Based on the value of the reach selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed.

  The reach determination process in step S304-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-7 (15) -1, it is determined whether or not a winning flag ("big hit winning flag" or "small winning winning flag" to be described later) is set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, if a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -1, that is, if a hit state does not occur, in step S304-7 (15) -2, the reach determination table is referred to and a new second determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either “0 or 1” that is a value corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, in step S304-7 (15) -3, after turning on the “front / rear out-of-front flag” indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach, this process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -2, in step S304-7 (15) -4, the reach determination table is taken into account and newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area. It is determined whether or not the value of the reach selection counter C3 coincides with one of the values “2 to 21” corresponding to “reach other than front and back deviation”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, in step S304-7 (15) -5, the “non-front / rear out-of-front flag” indicating the occurrence of reach other than front / rear out of reach is turned on, This process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S304-7 (15) -4, that is, when it is “completely off”, this processing is ended as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in step S304-8 following the reach determination process S304-7, a hold control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used for determining the contents of the change display) held and stored in the second special variable hold area. is there. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). In the hold control command, for example, as the hold information, information indicating the result of the second hit determination process or the second jackpot type determination process, information indicating a variable display triggered by winning of the lower start winning opening 33B, etc. Is included.

  After the process of step S304-8, or when a negative determination is made in step S304-1 or step S304-2, in step S304-9, whether or not the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33A. The determination is based on the detection information of the first start winning switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step S304-9, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S304-10, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning at the upper start winning opening 33A is set to the upper limit value (in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S304-10, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S304-10, the process proceeds to step S304-11, and the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S304-12, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type determination counter C2 and the reach selection counter C3 are stored in the first reserved area in the first special variable reserved area. After step S304-12, the process proceeds to step S304-13.

  In step S304-13, a first hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variation holding area is a value corresponding to big hit or small hit. Here, details of the first hit determination process in step S304-13 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S304-13-1, the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variation holding area matches the value “7” corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first jackpot determination table. It is determined whether or not to do.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-1, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, in step S304-13-2, the “big win winning flag” is turned on, and then the process ends. The first special game state generating means is configured by the function of the main controller 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to the first special game state in step S304-5-2 or step S304-13-2.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-13-1, the process proceeds to step S304-13-3, and based on the value of the “lottery mode flag”, it is determined whether the “high probability mode” is in effect. judge.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-3, that is, in the “high probability mode”, the process proceeds to step S304-13-4, and a hit random number newly stored in the first special variable hold area It is determined whether or not the value of the counter C1 is any one of “8 to 16” excluding the above “7” among the values corresponding to the jackpot stored in the second jackpot winning / bad determination table.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-4, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs during the “high probability mode”, the “hit winning flag” is turned on in step S304-13-2. After that, this processing is finished as it is.

  In addition, the determination process of step S304-5-1, step S304-5-4, step S304-13-1, and step S304-13-4 constitutes the first winning / losing lottery of the main controller 261 that executes this The function constitutes the first lottery means.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-13-3 or step S304-13-4, that is, if it is not “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S304-13-5.

  In step S304-13-5, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special variation holding area matches any of the values “101 to 110” corresponding to the small hits. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S304-13-5, that is, if it is determined that a small hit state is generated, the “small win winning flag” is turned on in step S304-13-6, and then the process ends. To do. The “small winning flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of a small hit state.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-13-5, the present process is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, the determination process in step S304-13-5 constitutes the second winning / losing lottery, and the second lottery means is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that executes this. Further, in step S304-13-6, the second special gaming state generating means is configured by the function of the main controller 261 that generates the small hit state corresponding to the second special gaming state.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in the subsequent step S304-14, when it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, it is newly stored in the first special variable holding area. Based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2, the first jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

  The first jackpot type determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the first jackpot type determination process, first, in step S304-14-1, it is determined whether or not the “big hit winning flag” is set in the first hit determination process S304-13 performed immediately before. If it is determined, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, the type of jackpot is determined with reference to the first jackpot type determination table.

  Specifically, in step S304-14-2, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation holding area is a value “0-19” corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”. It is determined whether it is either. Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-3 to turn on the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-14-2, the process proceeds to step S304-14-4, and the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable reservation area is “ It is determined whether or not the value is “20 to 39” corresponding to “8R probability variation big hit”. Here, when an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-5, the “8R probability variation big hit flag” is turned on, and this process ends. The “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “8R probability variation jackpot”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S304-14-4, the process proceeds to step S304-14-6. In step S304-14-6, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variation holding area is a value “40” corresponding to “2R probability variation jackpot”. . Here, if an affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to step S304-14-7, the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is turned on, and the present process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S304-14-6, the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special variable hold area is a value corresponding to “2R normal jackpot” “ Therefore, in step S304-14-8, the “2R normal jackpot flag” is turned on, and the process is terminated. The “2R normal jackpot flag” is state determination information for determining the occurrence of “2R normal jackpot”.

  Returning to FIG. 12, in the subsequent step S304-15, if it is determined in step S304-13 that the value of the winning random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the big hit or the small hit, it is newly set in the first special fluctuation holding area. Based on the stored value of the reach selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. Note that the reach determination process in step S304-15 is the same as the reach determination process in step S304-7, and the information to be compared is stored in the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area. The only difference is that the value is not the value but the value of the reach selection counter C3 newly stored in the first special variation holding area. Therefore, a detailed description of the reach determination process in step S304-15 is omitted.

  In further subsequent step S304-16, a hold control command setting process is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated. Note that the hold control command setting process in step S304-16 is the same as the hold control command setting process in step S304-8, and information related to the variable display to be processed is sent to the upper start winning opening 33A. For the sake of convenience, detailed description will be omitted because the only difference is that it is based on a ball.

  Returning to FIG. 11, following the start winning process in step S304, the through gate passing process in step S305 is performed. Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S305-1, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

  If a negative determination is made in step S305-1, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S305-1, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the variable display held in the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended in step S305-2. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc that counts the number is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S305-2 is affirmative, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S305-3. The normal hold counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S305-4, a random number related to the success / failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in the above step S303 is stored in the first area among the reserved areas in the RAM 503 where the normal variation reserved area is empty. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on. In the drawings, the main processing by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is denoted by a symbol beginning with S1.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait process is executed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S111 in order to clear (erase) the backup data. To do.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored. In this case as well, the process proceeds to step S111. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S111.

  The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  In the process of step S111, an “initialization command” is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like which are sub-side control devices. The sub-control device 262 that has received the “initialization command” executes its own initialization process as will be described later, and the value of the “game state determination value Xj” corresponding to the “normal effect mode” that is the initial setting. “1” is stored in the game state storage area.

  The “game state determination value Xj” is information indicating an effect mode (effect mode) in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and corresponds to mode information. Further, the “game state determination value Xj” is set corresponding to each effect mode. In the present embodiment, the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “1” when the “normal performance mode” is set, and is set to “2” when the “short-time performance mode” is set. When the “probable effect mode” is set, “3” is set. When the “probable effect mode” is set, “4” is set.

  In the “normal effect mode”, for example, a plurality of stages for a normal effect mode in which background images are set in advance (in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. "Stage", "Park Stage" where trees and benches are displayed as shown in FIG. 60, "Suburban Stage" where a plurality of mountains etc. are displayed as shown in FIG. Is done. In the “normal effect mode”, the upper symbol display area occupies approximately １ ／ above the display portion 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and the middle symbol display area occupies approximately １ ／ of the center of the display portion 42a. The symbol display area occupies about one third of the lower part of the display unit 42a, and the symbol is configured to be variably displayed using almost the entire area of the display unit 42a.

  In the present embodiment, the stage displayed in the “normal effect mode” is configured to be selected by the sub-control device 262. Specifically, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “1”, the sub-control device 262 arbitrarily selects one of the above stages and is selected. The command related to the stage is transmitted to the display control device 45. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the received command, whereby the display corresponding to the selected stage is made on the decorative symbol display device 42. The stage displayed in the “normal effect mode” may be selected by the main controller 261. In this case, for example, a different “gaming state determination value Xj” may be set for each stage (for example, in “city center stage”, “11” is set as “gaming state determination value Xj”, and “park stage "12" may be set as "gaming state determination value Xj", and "13" may be set as "gaming state determination value Xj" in "suburban stage").

  The “time saving effect mode” is an effect mode that is mainly performed in a variable display after the end of “2R time emergency bonus”. In the “short-time effect mode”, a stage for a predetermined short-time effect mode in which the background image is different from the background image in the “normal effect mode” (in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 81, the display of the decorative symbol display device 42 In the section 42a, a state where the character is performing training is displayed, and a “training stage” in which characters such as “under training” are displayed. Furthermore, in the “short-time effect mode”, the symbol display area is provided slightly at a position off the center of the display unit 42a (in the present embodiment, the lower right side of the display unit 42a).

  Further, in the “short-time effect mode”, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to which the high support mode is given (for example, a number indicating the number of remaining fluctuations, a meter whose scale is decreased by one at the end of the fluctuation, etc.), Alternatively, information indicating the total number of changes since the “short-time effect mode” (for example, a number indicating the total number of changes since the “short-time effect mode”) is also displayed on the display unit 42a. Is done. For example, in the present embodiment, the numerical value (the numerical value between “remaining” and “day”) displayed in the area demarcated by the thick line on the display unit 42a is the remaining fluctuation to which the “high support mode” is given. Shows the number of times.

  In the present embodiment, the value of a “support number counter” to be described later is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 normally receives the received “support”. By controlling the display control device 45 based on the value of the “count counter”, the remaining number of changes is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. However, in this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, when “small hit” occurs in the “probability changing effect mode”, the effect mode is set to the “short-time effect mode”. The control device 262 measures the number of times the “variation pattern command” has been received (that is, the number of times of variation) since the “short-time effect mode” has been entered, and information corresponding to the remaining number of variations based on the number of times of measurement. can get. Based on this information, the sub-control device 262 controls the display control device 45 so that dummy information corresponding to the remaining number of changes is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. That is, when “small hit” occurs in the “probability changing effect mode”, a value irrelevant to the actual value of the “support number counter” is displayed as the remaining number of changes.

  The “support count counter” is a means for measuring the duration of the “high support mode” (the number of times the variable display is displayed). In the processing after the big jackpot, the values corresponding to various jackpots are counter values. Set as Further, the information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations and the like does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be omitted as appropriate.

  The “latent probability effect mode” is an effect mode mainly performed in a variable display after the end of “2R probability variation big hit” or “small hit”. In the “latent performance mode”, the background image has a stage for a predetermined latent performance mode that is different from the background images in the “normal performance mode” and the “short time production mode” (in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 76, for example, In the display part 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, a state in which a car carrying a character travels is displayed, and “business stage” in which characters such as “business in progress” are displayed). Further, in the “latent performance mode”, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner using almost the entire area of the display unit 42a as in the “normal performance mode”. Furthermore, as described above, the transition to the “latent accuracy effect mode” is performed not only at the end of “2R probability variation big hit” but also after the end of “small hit” or “2R normal big hit”. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode”.

  The “probability change effect mode” is an effect mode that is performed in a variable display after the end of “8R probability change jackpot” or “16R probability change jackpot”. In the “probability changing effect mode”, a stage for a predetermined probability changing effect mode in which the background image is different from the background image in the “normal effect mode”, the “short time effect mode”, and the “latent effect effect mode” (in this embodiment, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5B, a predetermined character is displayed on the display unit 42a, and “break stage” or the like that clearly indicates “high probability mode” such as “breaking” is displayed. . In the “probability changing effect mode”, as in the “short time effect mode”, the symbol display area is provided in a small position at a position off the center of the display unit 42a.

  In addition, each effect mode is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, It can change suitably. For example, the same stage may be displayed in each effect mode, and the background image may have a different hue in each effect mode (for example, in the “normal effect mode”, the background image is a full color scheme). In the “short-time effect mode”, the background image has a greenish color scheme, in the “latent accuracy effect mode”, the background image has a low-saturation (near black and white) monotone color scheme, and in the “probability effect mode”, the background image It may be a reddish color scheme). In the present embodiment, the variably displayed symbols are configured in the same manner in each effect mode, but in a specific effect mode, the symbols are different from the symbols in the other effect modes. May be displayed in a variable manner.

  Returning to FIG. 9, after the process of step S111, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S112 and the like).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112 and the like). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S112 or the like). In step S112, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S113, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the routine proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), the occurrence information of power-off is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( On the condition of S104: YES, S106: YES), the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power-off recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In the subsequent step S109, a “return command” (for example, the “payout return command”) for returning the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like serving as the sub control devices to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. The “return command” transmitted to the sub-control device 262 includes “game state determination value Xj” that is information indicating an effect mode when the power is turned off. Based on the “return command” including the “gaming state determination value Xj”, the sub control device 262 performs the effect modes of the decorative symbol display device 42 when the power is turned off (in this embodiment, “normal effect mode”, “time reduction effect”). Mode ”,“ latent performance mode ”or“ probability variation mode ”).

  In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S114, and the routine proceeds to normal processing.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S210 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S211 and S212 is executed with the remaining time. In the drawing, normal processing by the main control device 261 is denoted by a symbol beginning with S2.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the electric accessory 37 updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted to each sub-side. External output processing that is transmitted to the control device is executed. Here are some more specific examples.

  For example, based on the detection information of the above various detection switches, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, and if there is a winning ball, the winning ball corresponding to the number corresponding to the winning A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

  Further, a command including a “lottery mode flag” is output to the sub-control device 262.

  Further, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

  In the external output process, information for grasping the game state is output to the hall computer of the game hall by taking into account various information such as the “lottery mode flag” and the “big hit flag” described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process. For example, when a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and when there is no winning error, the signal is turned off. A signal is output.

  In addition, when the symbol display is performed by the decorative symbol display device 42, a “variation pattern command”, “symbol command”, “end command” described later, “round open command” described later, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 to which “variation pattern command”, “symbol command”, “ending command”, “round release command”, etc. are input, changes the decoration symbol display device 42 based on such various commands. The mode is determined, and an instruction is issued to the display control unit 45 to display the variation mode on the decorative design display device 42 (variation display). The function of executing the external output process (S201) in the main controller 261 constitutes a variation pattern command output unit.

  In step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what kind of control is performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the jackpot determination and the design in the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. The fluctuation pattern is set. Here, the first display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S205-1, with reference to various hitting hit flags ("big hit hit flag" and "small hit hit flag") described below, it is currently hit (in the big hit state or in the small hit state). It is determined whether or not.

  The “big hit flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the big hit state. In the present embodiment, the “big hit flag” is turned on when the big hit state is being set (“1” is set as the flag value), and the “big hit flag” is turned off when the big hit state is not being set ( “0” is set as the flag value).

  The “small hitting flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the small hit state is in progress. In the present embodiment, similarly to the big hit / medium flag, when the small hit state is in the state, the “small hit / medium flag” is turned on (“1” is set as the flag value), and when the small hit state is not in place The “small hitting medium flag” is turned off (“0” is set as the flag value).

  The hit state (big hit state and small hit state) includes the middle of the hit state and a predetermined time after the hit state ends. The predetermined time after the end of the hit state is the time until the normal game (variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R) starts after the end of the hit state, and this time zone is the decorative symbol display device. At 42, the winning state is ended, various gaming states given after the winning, display indicating various modes (ending effect), and the like are performed. Further, a period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 in a mode corresponding to the hit until the variable winning device 32 is released [generally this time. The band is also included in the win for display (opening effect) indicating the start of the hit state is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-1, that is, if the winning state is in effect, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-1, the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative symbol) is checked in step S205-2 by looking at the setting status of the “first display flag”. It is determined whether or not the display device 42) is in a variable display. Specifically, when the “first display flag” is set (in the ON state), it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the “first display flag” is canceled (in the OFF state). Is regarded as a stop display in a state where the variable display is stopped.

  The “first display flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the first or second special display device 43L or 43R is performing variable display. In the present embodiment, when the first or second special display device 43L, 43R is performing variable display, the “first display flag” is turned on (“1” is set as the flag value), and the first When the variable display is not being performed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the “first display flag” is turned off (“0” is set as the flag value). Further, the “first display flag” is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step S205-7 and step S205-7-27), And when the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step S205-14), it is turned off.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-2, that is, when the winning state is not being displayed and the variation is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S205-3, and the variation display (first display) triggered by winning at the lower start winning opening 33B. It is determined whether or not the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of hold (2 fluctuation display) is greater than zero.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-3, that is, if at least one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step S205-4. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is stored on hold (that is, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-3), the second variation display is stored regardless of whether there is storage storage in the first variation display. The processing related to the two-variable display (S205-4 to S205-6) will be executed. That is, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the processing related to the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ) Configuration.

  In a succeeding step S205-5, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S205-5, in step S205-6, a process for turning on / off the second holding lamp 46b and a process for causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S205-3, that is, when no second variation display is held and stored, in step S205-8, a variation triggered by winning in the upper start winning opening 33A. It is determined whether or not the upper hold counter Na for counting the number of hold of display (first variation display) is greater than zero. If a negative determination is made in step S205-8, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S205-8, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step S205-9. In a succeeding step S205-10, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S205-10, in step S205-11, a process for turning on / off the first hold lamp 46a and a process for causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S205-7, a variable display setting process is performed. In the variation display setting process, a “variation pattern command” and a “design command” are set. First, prior to the description of the variation display setting process, the “variation pattern command” and the “design command” will be described.

  The “variation pattern command” is a command that is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and is used to determine the appearance aspect of the decorative symbol display device 42 such as the appearance and variation aspect of the symbol, and is stored in the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 502. Set based on. More specifically, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 49A to 49H, a variation pattern table corresponding to “16R probability variation big hit” and a variation pattern corresponding to “8R probability variation big hit”. Table, Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to “2R probable big hit”, Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to “2R short-range big hit”, Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to “2R normal big hit” or “Small hit”, Corresponding to “front / rear out of reach” The variation pattern table corresponding to “reach other than front / rear out of reach” and the variation pattern table corresponding to “complete out” are respectively in the production mode (values “1” to “4” of “game state determination value Xj”). ", That is," normal production mode "," short-time production mode "," latent production mode "and" probability production " It provided with a plurality, depending on the over-de "). 49, for convenience of illustration, it corresponds to a variation pattern table corresponding to “2R probability variation big hit”, a variation pattern table corresponding to “2R short time big hit”, and “2R normal big hit” or “small hit”. Although the variation pattern table is described separately, in practice, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, the variation pattern table corresponding to “2R probability variation big hit” and “2R normal The variation pattern table corresponding to “big hit” or “small win” is common. In addition, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to “2R short-time big hit” and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” It is the same as the table.

  Then, Step S205-7-4, Step S205-7-7, Step S205-7-10, Step S205-7-13, Step S205-7-18, Step S205-7-22, Step S205-7, which will be described later. When the variation pattern is determined at −25, a variation pattern table corresponding to the current presentation mode (“game state determination value Xj”) is selected from a plurality of table groups. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table, and a “variation pattern command” corresponding to this is set. The ROM 502 that stores the fluctuation pattern table constitutes the fluctuation pattern storage means in the present embodiment.

  The “variation pattern command” in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, and the upper 4 bits in the upper byte are configured by information for specifying the effect mode. That is, in this embodiment, the value of the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set as it is. In addition, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured by information specifying the hit type (big hit type or small hit), and the lower 8 bits are information specifying the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.). It is constituted by.

  The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these “variation pattern commands” and symbol variation modes (variation patterns) in a table. When the “variation pattern command” is received, the “variation pattern command” is received. Can be executed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The “variation pattern command” is not limited to the above configuration. For example, in order to reduce the processing load in the main controller 261, the “variation pattern command” is configured with 1 byte, and the upper 4 bits are configured with information (“game state determination value Xj”) specifying the effect mode. However, the lower 4 bits may be constituted by information specifying the type of hit. In this case, the sub control device 262 is provided with a table in which the relationship of the variation patterns of a plurality of symbols corresponding to one “variation pattern command” is stored. The control device 262 may be configured to select and determine a variation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.).

  Next, the “design command” will be described. The “symbol command” is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. In this embodiment, a combination of odd jackpot symbols, a combination of even jackpot symbols, a combination of front and rear detachment symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear detachment, a combination of completely detachment symbols, and a special symbol in the middle symbol display area A combination of symbols to be displayed (ie, a combination of symbols when a “2R probable jackpot” occurs or when a “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot” occurs in a specific performance mode. , Sometimes referred to as “special symbol combination.” In addition, in the diagram, there may be simply described as “special symbol”), a combination of prescribed symbols (that is, “2R short-term jackpot” occurs) Or, it designates seven categories of “a combination of symbols when“ 2R normal big hit ”or“ small win ”occurs in a specific performance mode). These classifications are indicated by, for example, “B1”, “B2”, “B3”, “B4”, “B5”, “B6”, “B7”, and any of these is set as a “symbol command” Is done. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these “symbol commands” and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the “symbol command” on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7 and 9 and the symbol command corresponding to the odd jackpot symbol combination is “B1”. Is set. Then, when “B1” indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the “symbol command”, the sub-control device 262 includes a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9 Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The even number jackpot symbol combination is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8. The “symbol command” corresponding to the even number jackpot symbol combination is “B2”. Is set. Then, when “B2” indicating an even-numbered jackpot symbol is set in the “symbol command”, the sub-control device 262 includes a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. Is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of back and forth symbols corresponds to the combination of back and forth symbols, where after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by one shift before and after the reach symbol. “B3” is set in the “design command”.

  The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to `` reach other than front / rear detachment '', where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol after reach occurs, and corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment. “B4” is set in the “design command”.

  The combination of complete detachment symbols corresponds to “complete detachment” in which no reach occurs, and “B5” is set in the “design command” corresponding to the combination of complete detachment symbols.

  In addition, a combination of symbols (special symbol combinations) in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area is special as a final stop symbol (a symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area) after reach has occurred. The symbol is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 50, the special symbols are combined when “2R probability variation jackpot” and “game state determination value Xj” are “1” or “3” (that is, “normal performance” This corresponds to “2R normal big hit” and “small win” (in “mode” or “latent performance mode”), and “B6” is set in this symbol command.

  Each symbol display area is a combination of the specified symbols after the reach has occurred (this reach is displayed as an effect, and the symbol displayed at the time of the reach and the final stop symbol is irrelevant) The predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in (in this example, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are “2”, “4”, and “6” in order from the top as described above). . As shown in FIGS. 45 and 50, the combination of the prescribed symbols is “2R hour and junior big hit” and “game state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4” (that is, “time reduction effect”). This corresponds to “2R normal jackpot” and “small jackpot” (in the “mode” or “probability effect mode”), and “B7” is set in this symbol command.

  Although details will be described later, when “B3” to “B5” are set in the “symbol command”, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as a stop symbol.

  Specifically, when “B3” indicating the combination of front and rear symbols is set to “design command”, the sub-control device 262 that has received the “symbol command” stores it in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. The combination of symbols corresponding to the front / rear out of reach is determined as the stop symbol.

  Further, when “B4” indicating a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment is set to “symbol command”, the sub-control device 262 that has received the “symbol command” is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear detachment in the RAM 553 The combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than the front and rear deviations is determined as the stop symbol.

  Further, when “B5” indicating a combination of completely out of symbols is set to “design command”, the sub-control unit 262 that has received the “design command” receives the complete out of symbol buffer stored in the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the detachment is determined as a stop symbol.

  When “B6” is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines a combination of symbols in which the special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area as the stop symbol. In addition, the sub-control device 262 displays the symbols in the upper symbol display area stored in the front / rear detachment symbol buffer or the reach symbol buffer other than the detachment symbol as the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area, And the symbol of the lower symbol display area is displayed.

  Further, when “B7” is set in the “symbol command”, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of the prescribed symbols as the combination of symbols.

  Next, details of the variable display setting process in step S205-7 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-7-1, it is determined whether or not the “small winning flag” is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the variable display corresponds to “small hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-1, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not correspond to “small hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-2.

  In step S205-7-2, it is determined whether or not the “big hit winning flag” is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is determined that the variable display corresponds to “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-3. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation display does not correspond to “big hit” or “small hit”, that is, when it is out of place. Shifts to Step S205-7-17.

  In step S205-7-3, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display corresponds to “16R probability variation jackpot” by determining whether or not the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is ON.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-3, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to “16R probability variation jackpot”, in step S205-7-4, it corresponds to “16R probability variation jackpot”. The variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, a “design command” is set in step S205-7-5. In the present embodiment, a jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd symbol or an even symbol) is determined in consideration of the symbol table stored in the ROM 502 and corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”. "Design command" (in this embodiment, "B1" or "B2") is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-3, the process proceeds to step S205-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the “8R probability variation big hit flag” is on, so that the fluctuation display is “8R probability variation”. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to “big hit”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-6, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to “8R probability variation jackpot”, it corresponds to “8R probability variation jackpot” in step S205-7-7. The fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the fluctuation pattern table to be set, and set in the “fluctuation pattern command”. Subsequently, a “design command” is set in step S205-7-8. In the present embodiment, a jackpot symbol (whether it is an odd symbol or an even symbol in this embodiment) is determined in consideration of the symbol table corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot” stored in the ROM 502, and the corresponding “ "Design command" (in this embodiment, "B1" or "B2") is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the “symbol command” set in the case of “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” is not clearly distinguished depending on the type of jackpot, and is common. Can be set. In other words, the relationship between the stop symbol and the jackpot type is clear, such as “odd symbol” is stopped when “16R probability variation jackpot” and “even number symbol” is stopped when “8R probability variation jackpot”. It is not necessarily associated with. In other words, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds given during the jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, according to each symbol table, for example, if “16R probability variation big hit”, it is easy to stop display with “odd symbol”, and the symbol appearance rate may be set to be different depending on the type of each big hit. Further, for example, when “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” is selected, a stop symbol may be selected based on one symbol table regardless of the jackpot type.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-6, the process proceeds to step S205-7-9, and it is determined whether or not the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is on, so that the fluctuation display is “2R probability variation”. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to “big hit”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-9, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to “2R probability variation big hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-10 and corresponds to “2R probability variation big hit”. The fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the fluctuation pattern table to be set, and set in the “fluctuation pattern command”. After that, in step S205-7-11, a “symbol command” (“B6” in the present embodiment) that will display a special symbol combination is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-7-9, the process proceeds to step S205-7-12, and it is determined whether or not the “2R time / shortage hit flag” is on, so that the fluctuation display is “2R time / shortness”. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to “big hit”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-12, that is, if the variable display corresponds to “2R short junior bonus”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-13 and corresponds to “2R junior big bonus” The fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the fluctuation pattern table to be set, and set in the “fluctuation pattern command”. After that, in step S205-7-14, a “symbol command” (“B7” in the present embodiment) that will display a combination of defined symbols is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-7-12, the process proceeds to step S205-7-15, and it is determined whether or not the “2R normal jackpot flag” is on, so that the fluctuation display is “2R. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to “normal jackpot”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-15, that is, if the variable display corresponds to “2R normal big hit”, if an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-1 (the variable display is As in the case of “small hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-7-16. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-15, that is, the “16-probable big win flag”, the “8R probable big win flag”, etc., even though the “big-winning winning flag” is on. If none of the jackpot flags is on, the process is terminated.

  In step S205-7-16, whether or not the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, that is, whether or not the effect mode is “normal effect mode” or “latent effect effect mode”. Determine whether. When the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S205-7-16: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-7-10, and “2R normal big hit” or “small win” The variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to, and set in the “variation pattern command”. After that, in step S205-7-11, a “symbol command” (“B6” in the present embodiment) that will display a special symbol combination is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, when “2R probability variation big hit”, “2R normal big hit”, or “small hit” occurs. The “variation pattern command” is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same “design command” is set. Therefore, in the “normal effect mode” or the “latent probability effect mode”, when “2R probability variation big hit”, “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” occurs, the “2R” It is not possible to determine whether it is “probable jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot” [however, in the “latent probability mode” of “high probability mode”, When a “big hit” occurs, the effects after the symbol stops (such as during the big hit) differ from the effects when the “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” occurs. It is discernable.]

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S205-7-16 (that is, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”), the process proceeds to step S205-7-13. The variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to “2R normal big hit” or “small hit”, and is set in the “variation pattern command”. After that, in step S205-7-14, a “symbol command” (“B7” in the present embodiment) that will display a combination of defined symbols is set, and the process proceeds to step S205-7-27. To do. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, “2R short-time big hit”, “2R normal big hit”, or “small win” occurs. In this case, the “variation pattern command” is set from the common variation pattern table, and the same “design command” is set. Therefore, when “2R short-range big hit”, “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” occurs in the “short-time production mode” or “probability variation production mode”, depending on the variation pattern of the design and the stop design, Cannot be discriminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-7-2, that is, if it is “out”, it is determined in step S205-7-17 whether or not the “front / rear out flag” is on. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-17, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to “front / rear out of reach”, the fluctuation corresponding to “front / rear out of reach” in step S205-7-18. Determine the variation pattern with reference to the pattern table and set it to the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, in step S205-7-19, the “front / rear off flag” is turned off. Furthermore, in step S205-7-20, a “symbol command” (“B3” in this embodiment) corresponding to the back and forth symbols is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  If a negative determination is made in step 205-7-17, it is determined in step S205-7-21 whether or not the “non-front / reverse flag” is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the fluctuation display corresponds to “reach other than front / rear off”, “reach other than front / rear off” is determined in step S205-7-22. The variation pattern is determined by referring to the corresponding variation pattern table, and set in the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, in step S205-7-23, the “non-front-reverse flag” is turned off. Furthermore, in step S205-7-24, a symbol command (in this embodiment, “B4”) corresponding to symbols other than front / rear deviation is set, and then the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  If a negative determination is made in step S205-7-21, that is, if the change display corresponds to “completely out”, the change corresponding to “completely out” in step S205-7-25. Determine the variation pattern with reference to the pattern table and set it to the “variation pattern command”. Subsequently, in step S205-7-26, a “symbol command” (“B5” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the completely off symbol is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-7-27.

  The “variation pattern command” and “symbol command” set as described above are output in the above-described external output process (step S201). Then, the sub-control device 262 to which these commands are input determines the variation mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the command, and displays the variation mode on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display). The display control device 45 is instructed.

  In step S205-7-27, start setting processing is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display is satisfied in the special display devices 43L and 43R. In the start setting process, the “first display flag” is turned on, and the “first display timer” setting process is performed.

  The “first display timer” is a means for measuring the variation time (residual time for variation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is used when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the time set in the “first display timer” (variable display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R) is a value corresponding to the symbol variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Is done. When a control signal for starting the variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing (step S201) of the normal processing based on the setting of the “first display timer”. The variable display is started in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

  Returning to FIG. 19, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 205-2, that is, when the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S <b> 205-12 and a first display timer subtraction process is performed. In the first display timer subtraction process, the value of “first display timer” is decremented by one. As described above, the normal process including the first display control process in step S205 is performed every 4 msec. Therefore, when the “first display flag” is on, the “first display timer” is set every 4 msec. The value will be decreased by one. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the “first display timer” in step S205-7-27.

  Subsequently, in step S205-13, it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in consideration of the value of the “first display timer” after the subtraction. When the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S205-13.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-13, that is, if the value of the “first display timer” is greater than 0, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is displayed in step S205-17. The switching display setting for continuing is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing in the normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S205-13, the “first display flag” is canceled (turned off) in step S205-14, and the special display devices 43L and 43R stop display in step S205-15. Set the stop display to perform. Note that, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the next external output process in the normal process. For example, in the case of “16R probability variation big hit”, “9−” is stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for several seconds).

  After the stop display setting is performed in step S205-15, the change end time setting process is performed in step S205-16, and this process is terminated. Next, the change end time setting process in step S205-16 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-1, the “big hit winning flag” is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the stop display corresponds to “big hit”. Here, in the case of corresponding to “big hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2 and a big hit setting process is performed. And after completion | finish of step S205-16-2, a change end time setting process is complete | finished. In the jackpot setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform “opening effect” from the stop of the variable display to the start of the special prize state, and the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 are controlled. Following the “production”, processing necessary for starting the special prize state is performed. Specifically, in the big hit setting process, the “big hit flag”, “remaining released number counter”, “specified number K1”, “open waiting timer”, and “opening command” are set. Next, the jackpot setting process in step S205-16-2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-2-1, it is determined whether or not the “16R probability variation big hit flag” is on. Here, when the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S205-16-2-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-2, and the open / close pattern control table is referred to, and “ “15” is set as an initial value in the “remaining opening number counter”.

  In the opening / closing pattern control table, as shown in FIG. 51, a “remaining opening number counter” corresponding to the number of occurrences of the special prize state in various hit states (in the case of small hits, the maximum number of occurrences of the special prize state). The initial value, the maximum value of the opening time of the open / close plate 32b in each special prize state (each round), the interval time between the special prize states, and the like are set in advance.

  Further, the “remaining open number counter” is state determination information for determining the remaining number of special prize states executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the remaining number of opening / closing processes of the variable winning device 32. . The initial value of the “remaining open number counter” is one less than the number of special award states in the winning state (the maximum number in the case of small hits) even when the “remaining open number counter” is 0. This is because the variable winning device 32 is opened.

  After step S205-16-2-2, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-3, taking into account the opening / closing pattern control table, and per opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing plate 32b in the big hit state. The predetermined number K1 which is the maximum number of winning prizes to the variable winning device 32 is set. As described above, the specified number K1 is determined in advance for each open type (operation mode of the open / close plate 32b related to one open / close operation) such as “long open” or “short open”. In step S205-16-2-3, “10” corresponding to “long open” is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After setting the prescribed number K1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-4, and an “opening command” setting process corresponding to “16R probability variation big hit” is performed with reference to the opening command table (see FIG. 52).

  In the opening command table, “opening command” that is set when a winning occurs in the “gaming state determination value Xj” and “lottery mode” that are currently set is stored for each type. Yes. Then, the setting process of the “opening command” is performed based on the “gaming state determination value Xj”, the “lottery mode”, the various “big hit flag”, and the “small win winning flag”. "Is selected.

  In addition, the “opening command” is output to the sub-control device 262 in order to perform an “opening effect” that is performed from the stop of the variable display to the start of the special prize state on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is what is done. The sub-control device 262 stores a relationship between the “opening command” and the opening effect in a table. When the sub-control device 262 receives the “opening command”, the display control is performed based on the received “opening command”. The device 45 is controlled, and as a result, the opening effect corresponding to the received “opening command” is executed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, in the “opening effect”, for example, an effect indicating the type of the special prize state that is started after the “opening effect” or an action in which the player launches a game ball toward the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (“ “Right-handed” is recommended, and the production corresponding to the case where the production mode is shifted to the “latent production mode” or the “short-time production mode” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “opening effect” includes “16R probability variation corresponding opening effect”, “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect”, “latent probability corresponding opening effect”, and “short-time corresponding opening effect”.

  The “16R probability change corresponding opening effect” is an effect that indicates that a positive result has been obtained in the previous reach effect (in the present embodiment, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character shows comic talent to the audience). In the embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 99, the audience receives comics, the audience seats are wrapped in laughter, and a joyful character or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. It is an effect that continues after the symbol is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 62 to 65, a series of effects after the change is stopped [In this embodiment, for example, the audience can be laughed and the curtain is closed with favorable reception. Next to the effect, a predetermined character (refer to FIG. 65) is displayed], and then a predetermined display (for example, FIG. Is a production which reference) is carried out. When the “16R probability variation corresponding opening effect” is executed, “AA” is set as the “opening command”. As shown in FIG. 65, a character that does not appear at the time of “8R probability variation jackpot” is displayed at the time of “16R probability variation jackpot”, and a character of “super” is displayed before the jackpot character as illustrated in FIG. Since it is displayed, the player can grasp that “16R probability variation jackpot” has been won.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect” continues after an effect indicating that a positive result has been obtained in the previous reach effect, and then the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. This is an effect, and a series of effects (FIGS. 62 to 64) is followed by a predetermined display (see FIG. 67) that clearly indicates “8R probability variation jackpot”. Note that the character (FIG. 65) displayed at the time of “8R probability variation jackpot” is not displayed at the time of “8R probability variation jackpot”, and the character “super” is displayed before the jackpot character as shown in FIG. Therefore, the player can grasp that “8R probability variation jackpot” has been won. When “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect” is executed, “AB” is set as the “opening command”. Of the opening effects of “8R probability variation jackpot”, the effects before the display (see FIG. 67) clearly indicating that “8R probability variation jackpot” is displayed are the opening effects of “16R probability variation jackpot”. This is the same as the effect before the character (see FIG. 65) appears. In other words, the first half of the opening effect is common to “8R probability variation jackpot” and “16R probability variation jackpot”, and the effort for creating the effect is reduced and the data capacity on the apparatus side is reduced.

  The “latent probability corresponding opening effect” is an effect that is executed when “2R probability variation big hit”, “2R normal big hit”, or “small hit” occurs. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, it is displayed in the middle symbol display area. An effect as if the special symbol ZS being operated is performed (for example, an effect as if the telephone is vibrating or an effect such that a ringing tone of the telephone flows from the speaker SP). In the case of executing the “latency corresponding opening effect”, “AC” is set as the “opening command”. Since the special symbol displayed at the time of the change stop is continuously displayed from the change stop to the opening effect, the decorative symbol display device 42 performs a continuous effect from the change stop to the opening effect. .

  The “short-time opening effect” is an effect that is executed when “2R short-time jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot”, or “small jackpot” occurs. (In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 109, for example, as shown in FIG. 109, the audience does not receive comics and the audience seat is wrapped in silence), and then the prescribed design Is an effect that continues after the combination is stopped and displayed (in this embodiment, for example, an effect in which a disappointed character or the like is displayed as shown in FIG. 78). When “opening effect corresponding to time reduction” is executed, “AD” is set as the “opening command”.

  Returning to FIG. 22, in the “opening command” setting process in step S205-16-2-4, “AA” is set as the “opening command” because the “16R probability variation big hit flag” is on.

  Subsequent to step S205-16-2-4, in step S205-16-2-5, a “waiting timer for release” is set. The “open wait timer” is information used to wait for the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b to wait until the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed after the opening effect is completed. The “open wait timer” is configured to be set to a predetermined value according to the “opening command”, that is, according to the duration of the opening effect. For example, when the duration of the opening effect in “16R probability variation big hit” is 30 seconds (30000 msec), “7500” is set for “waiting for opening” in step S205-16-2-5.

  After setting the “release wait timer”, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-6, and the “release wait flag” setting process is performed. The “open wait flag” is state determination information used to determine whether or not the open / close processing of the open / close plate 32b in the hit state is possible. When the “open wait flag” is turned off, the open / close plate 32b is opened / closed. Processing is possible.

  After step S205-16-2-6, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-7, and the “return flag” is turned off. The “return flag” changes the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the “short-time effect mode” to the “probable effect effect mode” which is an effect mode clearly indicating the “high probability mode”. This is state determination information for determining whether or not to perform processing (return processing). When the “return flag” is on, “return processing” can be executed. In step S205-16-2-7, “return flag” is turned off when “return flag” is on and “return processing” is scheduled to be executed, and various “big hits” occur. In addition, the execution of “return processing” is canceled. After the “return flag” is turned off, the “big hit flag” is set in step S205-16-2-8, and this process is terminated.

  In addition, in step S205-16-2-1, when the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is OFF (S205-16-2-1: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-9, and “ It is determined whether or not the “8R probability variation big hit flag” is on. Here, when the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S205-16-2-9: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-10, and the open / close pattern control table is referred to, and “ “7” is set as an initial value in the “remaining release number counter”.

  Subsequent to step S205-16-2-10, in step S205-16-2-11, the specified number K1 is set in consideration of the open / close pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-11, “10” corresponding to “long open” is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After the prescribed number K1 is set, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-12, and an “opening command” setting process corresponding to “8R probability variation big hit” is performed with reference to the opening command table. In step S205-16-2-12, since the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is on, “AB” is set as the “opening command”.

  Subsequent to step S205-16-2-12, in step S205-16-2-13, an “open wait timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect of “8R probability variation big hit” is set. For example, when the duration of the opening effect at “8R probability variation big hit” is 20 seconds (20000 msec), “5000” is set to “open waiting timer” in step S205-16-2-13.

  After setting the “release wait timer”, the “release wait flag” setting process in step S205-16-2-6, the “return flag” turn-off process in step S205-16-2-7, and step S205-16 The process of setting the “big hit flag” in 2-8 is performed, and this process is terminated.

  In addition, in step S205-16-2-9, when the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is off (S205-16-2-9: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-14, and “ It is determined whether or not the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is ON. If the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S205-16-2-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-15, and the “remaining pattern control table” is referred to. “1” is set as an initial value in the “opening number counter”.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-16, and a setting process for the specified number K1 is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-16, “3” corresponding to “short open” is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After setting the prescribed number K1, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-17, and “AC” is set as the “opening command” in “2R probability variation big hit”.

  Subsequent to step S205-16-2-17, in step S205-16-2-18, an “open wait timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when “AC” is set as the “opening command”. Is set. For example, if the duration of the opening effect when the “opening command” is “AC” is 5 seconds (5000 msec), “1250” is set for the “waiting for release timer” in step S205-16-2-18. Is set.

  After setting the “waiting for release timer”, the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this processing is terminated.

  When a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-14, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-19, in which it is determined whether or not the “2R short-term hitting flag” is on. When the “2R short-term bonus flag” is on (S205-16-2-19: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-20, and the “opening / closing pattern control table” is referred to, “1” is set as an initial value in the “counter”.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-21, and a setting process for the specified number K1 is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-21, “3” corresponding to “short open” is set as the prescribed number K1.

  After the prescribed number K1 is set, the process proceeds to S205-16-2-22, where “AD” is set as the “opening command” in “2R short-time bonus”.

  After step S205-16-2-22, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-23, and “open waiting timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when “AD” is set as the “opening command”. Is set. For example, if the duration of the opening effect when the “opening command” is “AD” is 5 seconds (5000 msec), “1250” is set for the “waiting for release timer” in step S205-16-2-23. Is set.

  After setting the “waiting for release timer”, the processing of steps S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this processing is terminated.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-2-19, that is, if a “2R normal jackpot” has occurred, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-24, and the open / close pattern control table is referred to. Then, “1” is set as an initial value in the “remaining open number counter”.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-25, and a setting process for the specified number K1 is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table. In step S205-16-2-25, “3” corresponding to “short opening” is set as the prescribed number K1.

  Next, an “opening command” setting process corresponding to “2R normal jackpot” is performed. It should be noted that the “opening command” set when “2R normal jackpot” occurs may differ depending on the “gaming state determination value Xj” (that is, the effect mode) at the time of occurrence. Therefore, a determination process of “gaming state determination value Xj” is performed prior to the setting process of “opening command” in “2R normal jackpot”.

  Specifically, after step S205-16-2-25, the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-26, and it is determined whether or not the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”. To do. If the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S205-16-2-26: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-17, and the “opening command "" Is set as "AC". That is, when the production mode is the “normal production mode” or the “latent production mode”, the same “opening command” as the “opening command” set when the “2R probability variation big hit” occurs is set. Is done. In step S205-16-2-18, an “opening waiting timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when “AC” is set as the “opening command” is set. Then, the process of step S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is neither “1” nor “3” (S205-16-2-26: NO), the process proceeds to step S205-16-2-22. “AD” is set as the “opening command”. That is, when the production mode is “time reduction production mode” or “probability production production mode”, the “opening command” is set to the same as the “opening command” that is set when “2R shortage big hit” occurs. The In step S205-16-2-23, an “opening waiting timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when “AD” is set as the “opening command” is set. Then, the process of step S205-16-2-6 to S205-16-2-8 is performed, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to the change end time setting process of FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-1, the process proceeds to step S205-16-3, taking into consideration the “small winning flag” and displaying the stop. Whether or not corresponds to “small hit”. Here, if it corresponds to “small hit”, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4, and small hit setting processing is performed. And after completion | finish of step S205-16-4, a change end time setting process is complete | finished. In the small hit setting process, the process for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the “opening effect” from the stop of the variable display to the start of the special prize state, and the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 are controlled. Subsequent to the “opening effect”, processing necessary for starting the special prize state is performed. Specifically, in the small hit setting process, the “small hitting flag”, “remaining open number counter”, “maximum winning number M1”, “open waiting timer”, and “opening command” are set. Next, the small hit setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S205-16-4-1, an initial value of the “remaining opening number counter” at the time of small hitting is set in consideration of the open / close pattern control table. In the present embodiment, “1” is set as an initial value in the “remaining opening number counter”.

  Subsequent to step S205-16-4-1, in step S205-16-4-2, the maximum winning possible number M1 is set in consideration of the open / close pattern control table. The maximum winable number M1 is the maximum total number of game balls that can enter the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state, and is stored in advance in the open / close pattern control table. In the present embodiment, “10” is set as the maximum possible winning number M1.

  After the maximum winning possible number M1 is set, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-3, and it is determined whether or not the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”. When the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S205-16-4-3: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-4, and the “opening command” is “ AC "is set. That is, when the production mode is the “normal production mode” or the “latent production mode”, the same “opening command” as the “opening command” set when the “2R probability variation big hit” occurs is set. Is done. Accordingly, in the “normal effect mode” and the “latent probability effect mode”, the current lottery mode is maintained as it is based on the opening effect, “2R probability variation big hit” in which the lottery mode is set to “high probability mode”. It cannot be distinguished from “small hits”.

  Subsequent to step S205-16-4-4, in step S205-16-4-5, an “open waiting timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when “AC” is set as the “opening command”. Is set.

  Thereafter, in step S205-16-4-6, the “waiting for release flag” setting process is performed, and in step S205-16-4-7, the “small hitting flag” setting process is performed, and this process ends. In the small hit setting process, the “return flag” is not turned off unlike the big hit setting process. That is, it is configured so that execution of the “return effect” (return process) is not canceled due to occurrence of a small hit.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-4-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-4-8, and “AD” is set as the “opening command”. That is, when the production mode is “time reduction production mode” or “probability production production mode”, the “opening command” is set to the same as the “opening command” that is set when “2R shortage big hit” occurs. The Accordingly, in the “probability change effect mode”, the lottery mode is changed from the “high probability mode” to the “low probability mode” based on the opening effect (falls down), and the lottery mode is “high”. It is impossible to distinguish between “small hits” maintained in “probability mode”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, an “opening command” set when “2R normal big hit” occurs, and an “opening command” set when “small hit” occurs. Are configured to be the same. Therefore, based on the opening effect, it becomes impossible to distinguish between “2R normal jackpot” in which the lottery mode is changed to “low probability mode” and “small jackpot” in which the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. Yes.

  After step S205-16-4-8, in step S205-16-4-9, an “open wait timer” corresponding to the duration of the opening effect when “AD” is set as the “opening command” is set. Is done.

  Thereafter, in step S205-16-4-6, the “waiting for release flag” setting process is performed, and in step S205-16-4-7, the “small hitting flag” setting process is performed, and this process ends.

  Returning to the change end setting process of FIG. 21, if a negative determination is made in step S205-16-3, the process proceeds to step S205-16-5, and whether the counter value of the “support count counter” is “0”. Determine whether or not.

  In step S205-16-5, if the counter value of the “support count counter” is “0”, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the “support count counter” is set (when the counter value is other than “0”), it is considered that the “high support mode” is being set, and the “support count counter” is set in step S205-16-6. ”Is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S205-16-7.

  In step S205-16-7, it is determined whether or not a “return flag” is set. If the “return flag” is set (S205-16-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8 to perform return processing.

  The “return flag” is information used to determine whether or not to perform a return process, and is set when “small hit” occurs in the “probable change effect mode” in the small hit end setting process described later. (Step S206-14-5-3).

  Next, the return process of step S205-16-8 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the return process, first, in step S205-16-8-1, the value of “return counter” that can be set in the small hit end setting process (steps S206-14-5 and S206-14-5-4) described later. 1 is subtracted. Next, in step S205-16-8-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the “return counter” is “0”. Here, when the value of the “return counter” is not “0” (S205-16-8-2: NO), the return process is terminated. The “return counter” is a numerical value that defines the occurrence timing of the return process to the “probability changing effect mode” described above.

  On the other hand, when the value of the “return counter” is “0” (S205-16-8-2: YES), it is the timing for performing the return processing to the “probability effect mode” described above. In step S205-16-8-3, a “return effect command” is set. The “return effect command” is a “return effect command” that clearly indicates that the effect mode has shifted to the “probable change effect mode” (the break stage in this embodiment) after the change is stopped, and is in the “high probability mode”. This is a command output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the “decoration” to be performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. The sub-control device 262 to which the “return effect command” has been input controls the display control device 45, so that the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 “return effect” [FIG. 82 and FIG. 83]. In the present embodiment, for example, a predetermined character is displayed and characters such as characters indicating transition to the “probability changing effect mode” (characters such as “break mode re-entry” in this embodiment) are displayed] Make it.

  Returning to FIG. 24, following the setting of the “return effect command”, in step S205-16-8-4, the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “4”. Thereby, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the time of the next change is set to the “probability change effect mode”. Next, in step S205-16-8-5, the “return flag” is turned off. Thereafter, in S205-16-8-6, a “gaming state notification command” setting process is performed, and the return process is terminated.

  The “gaming state notification command” is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of an effect mode that is newly set after the end of the jackpot. The “gaming state notification command” includes a “gaming state determination value Xj” related to a new effect mode.

  Returning to the description of the change end time setting process in FIG. 21, when the “return flag” is not set (S205-16-7: NO), or after the return process (S205-16-8) ends. Then, the process proceeds to step S205-16-9, and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the “support count counter” is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the provision of the high support mode). Here, if the value of the “support number counter” is “0”, a process of switching the value of the “support mode flag” to “A0” indicating “low support mode” is performed in step S205-16-10.

  The “support mode flag” is status determination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. In the present embodiment, as the flag value of “support mode flag”, “A0” is set when the winning support mode is “low support mode”, and when the winning support mode is “high support mode”. “A1” is set. The value “A” of the upper 4 bits in the “support mode flag” is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not particularly used for determining the gaming state.

  In addition to the “support mode flag” switching process in step S205-16-10, the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “1” in step S205-16-11. Thereby, the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change time is set to the “normal effect mode”. When the stage in the “normal effect mode” is selected by the main controller 261, a plurality of “gaming state determination values Xj” corresponding to the respective stages in the “normal effect mode” are selected in step S205-16-11. One of them is selected at random.

  Further, in the subsequent step S205-16-12, a “gaming state notification command” (including the “gaming state determination value Xj” set to “1”) is set, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S205-16-9 that the counter value of the “support count counter” is not “0”, this process is terminated. Note that the big hit setting process (step S205-16-2) or the small hit setting process (step S205-16-4) is performed in the setting process at the end of the change, and the “big hit middle flag” or “small hit middle flag” is set. In such a case, the “lottery mode flag” may be reset once (“50” is set), and the “high probability mode” may be interrupted during the big hit or the small hit.

  Now, returning to FIG. 10, in the normal process, the variable winning device control process of step S206 is executed following step S205. In this process, the control content of the variable winning device 32 is set as to what control is performed in the variable winning device 32. Thereby, when the big hit state or the small hit state is reached, the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times.

  Next, the variable winning device control process of step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S206-1, it is determined whether or not the “waiting for release flag” is on. When the “waiting for release flag” is on (S206-1: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-2 and one “waiting for release timer” is subtracted. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-3, and it is determined whether or not the “open wait timer” is zero. That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the fluctuation stop is equal to or longer than the waiting time until the opening / closing operation (special prize state) is started in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32. Here, when the “waiting timer for opening” is 0 (S206-3: YES), it is the start timing of the opening / closing operation (special award state) in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, so that the process proceeds to step S206-4. The process proceeds to turn off the “waiting for release flag”. On the other hand, when the “open wait timer” is not 0 (S206-3: NO), the start timing of the opening operation in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 has not yet been reached, and thus this processing is terminated.

  After the “open wait flag” is turned off in step S206-4, 0 is set as the initial value in the “open count counter” in step S206-5. The “opening counter” is a state determination for determining the cumulative number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big hit state or the small hit state, that is, the cumulative number of execution times of the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b during the hit state. Information.

  After step S206-5 or when a negative determination is made in step S206-1, the process proceeds to step S206-6, and it is determined whether or not the “big hit flag” is on. Here, when the “big hit flag” is on (S206-6: YES), that is, a big hit occurs and the waiting for the open / close processing in the open / close plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is canceled (opening effect) Is completed), the process of steps S206-7 to S206-9 is performed, and the opening / closing plate 32b is added by the number obtained by adding 1 to the initial value of the “remaining opening number counter” set in the jackpot setting process described above. Open and close.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the “opening number counter” is zero. Here, when the value of the “release count counter” is 0 (S206-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8, and a big hit special prize state start process is performed. That is, the setting process related to the opening of the first round in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed. The big hit special prize state start process is performed for each round. In this process, the “first variable flag”, “first variable timer”, and “winning counter” necessary for the opening / closing process of the opening / closing plate 32b are performed. A process of setting “Vx” is performed, and an “xx round release command” to be described later is set. Also, only the processing related to the first round of the big hit special prize state start processing is when the value of the “opening counter” is 0 (S206-7: YES) and the branch destination (step S206-8). However, the jackpot special prize state start processing related to the other rounds is performed in a jackpot variable variable winning device control process (step S206-9) described later.

  Here, the big hit special prize state start processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S206-8-1, the “first variable flag” is turned on. The “first variable flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is open. In the present embodiment, when the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is in an open state, the “first variable flag” is turned on (“1” is set as the flag value), and the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 32 is set. When 32b is closed, the “first variable flag” is turned off (“0” is set as the flag value).

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-8-2, and 0 is set as an initial value in “winning counter Vx”. The “winning counter Vx” is a winning counting means for counting the number of game balls won to the variable winning device 32. In the present embodiment, in the switch reading process S301 (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined based on the detection information of the count switch 223 whether or not the variable winning device 32 has been won, and the variable winning device 32 is awarded. If it is determined that there has been, the value of the “winning counter Vx” is incremented by one. The “winning counter Vx” is reset every round in the case of a big win (0 is set as an initial value), but in the case of a small win, an initial value is set in the first opening. Later, no reset is performed on subsequent releases. That is, in the case of a small win, the total number of game balls won for the variable winning device 32 in the small win state is measured in the “winning counter Vx”.

  Subsequent to step S206-8-2, in step S206-8-3, 1 is added to the “opening number counter”. For example, in the first big hit special prize start processing at the big hit time, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the “open count counter”, and the “open count counter” is updated to 1.

  After step S206-8-3, the process proceeds to step S206-8-4, and a setting process of “first variable timer” is performed. The “first variable timer” is a measuring means for measuring the opening time (occurrence time of the special prize state) of the variable winning device 32, the interval between the special prize states, and the like. This is taken into account when determining whether or not the specified time has elapsed since the end of opening. In step S206-8-4, the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to each type is set in the “first variable timer” with reference to the opening / closing pattern control table (see FIG. 51). For example, when the opening mode of the opening / closing plate 32b is “long open” as in “16R probability variation big hit”, “7500” is set in the “first variable timer”, and “2R probability variation big hit” or “2R When the open / close mode of the open / close plate 32b is “short open” as in the case of “normal jackpot”, “100” is set in the “first variable timer”. Thus, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is set to “30 seconds” in the case of “long opening”, and “0.4 seconds in the case of“ short opening ”. Will be set.

  After setting the “first variable timer”, the process proceeds to step S206-8-5, and it is determined whether or not the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” or “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is on. If the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” or “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is ON (S206-8-5: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-6, and the round stored in the ROM 502 is released. Based on the command table (see FIG. 53), the setting process of “xx round release command” is performed (note that “xx” is substituted with the current number of rounds, that is, the value of “open count counter”). After the “xx round release command” is set, this process ends.

  Note that the “xx round opening command” is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to execute an opening effect that is performed while the variable winning device 32 is open in the winning state on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. The “xx round opening command” is set in accordance with the number of opening times of the variable winning device 32. For example, “1 round opening command” is set for the first opening, and “ “2-round release command” is set.

  Furthermore, the “xx round release command” in the present embodiment has a 2-byte configuration, the upper byte is configured by information corresponding to the effect during release, and the lower byte is the value of the “open count counter”, that is, the jackpot It is composed of information indicating the number of opening operations (in this embodiment, the value of “opening counter”).

  The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the “xx round release command” and the effect during release in a table, and the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx round release command” and displays the display control device 45. Is controlled, and the decorative symbol display device 42 executes the opening effect corresponding to the received “xx round opening command”.

  In the setting process of the “xx round release command” in step S206-8-6, since the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” or “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is on, as shown in FIG. 53, the “xx round release command” “BAxx” is set. The sub-control device 262 that has received “BAxx” as the “xx round release command” controls the display control device 45 to cause the display part 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the opening effect. In the opening effect at this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the display unit 42a displays information such as a numerical value indicating how many open (how many rounds) the predetermined character, etc. Is displayed.

  In this embodiment, the “xx round release command” corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot” and the “xx round release command” corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot” are common commands. The same opening effect is performed from the first round to the eighth round. Since a common opening effect is performed using a common command, it is possible to reduce the effort of creating an effect and reduce the data capacity and processing load.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206-8-5, the process proceeds to step S206-8-7, and it is determined whether or not the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is on. When the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S206-8-7: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-8, and the “lottery mode flag” is taken into consideration and the “high probability mode” is set. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S206-8-8 (in the case of “low probability mode”), the process proceeds to step S206-8-9, where “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2”. In other words, it is determined whether the current production mode is the “time reduction production mode”. When a negative determination is made in step S206-8-9, that is, in the “normal performance mode” or the “latent performance mode” of the “low probability mode”, the process proceeds to step S206-8-10. With reference to the round release command table, “BBxx” is set as the “xx round release command”. After the “xx round release command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-8-8 or step S206-8-9, the process proceeds to step S206-8-11, and the “xx round “BDxx” is set as the “release command”. After the “xx round release command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-7, the process proceeds to step S206-8-12, and it is determined whether or not the “2R short-term hitting flag” is on. Then, if the “2R short-term bonus flag” is ON (S206-8-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, and the “xx round release command” is taken into account by referring to the round release command table. As “BCxx”. After the “xx round release command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-12, that is, if it is considered that “2R normal jackpot” has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-8-14, and “gaming state determination value Xj” Is “1” or “3”. When the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-8-14: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-8-10, referring to the round release command table. “BBxx” is set as the “xx round release command”, and this processing ends. That is, when the “2R normal big hit” occurs when the production mode is “normal production mode” or “latent production mode”, the previous stage of the ending production indicating the transition to the “latency production mode” Performing in

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-8-14, the process proceeds to step S206-8-13, "BCxx" is set as the "xx round release command", and this process ends. . In other words, when the “2R normal jackpot” occurs when the stage mode is “time reduction mode” or “probability variation mode”, the same opening effect as when “2R time jackpot” occurs is performed. Is called.

  Returning to the variable winning device control process of FIG. 25, if a negative determination is made in step S206-7, or after the big hit special prize state start process of step S206-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9 and the big win time variable. A winning device control process is performed. Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot variable winning device control process will be described.

  First, in step S206-9-1, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the “first variable timer”.

  In a succeeding step S206-9-2, it is determined whether or not the “first variable flag” is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processing in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 is performed.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-9-3, whether or not the count value of the “first variable timer” is “0”, that is, one open / close operation of the open / close plate 32b (“long open” or “short open”). It is determined whether or not an open time (specified time “30 seconds” or “0.4 seconds”) remains.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-3, the process proceeds to step S206-9-4, and whether or not the value of the “winning counter Vx” is equal to or greater than the prescribed number K1, that is, in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls won in the variable prize winning device 32 has reached the maximum number of winning prizes (specified number “10” or “3”). If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-4, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize-winning device 32 (timing for completion of the special prize state) has not yet arrived, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-3 or step S206-9-4, that is, if it is time to close the variable winning device 32 (currently open), step In S206-9-5, whether or not the counter value of the “remaining release number counter” is “0”, that is, the number of executions of the special prize state (“long release” or “short release”) has reached the specified number. It is determined whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-5, an open end setting process is performed in step S206-9-6, and this process ends. In the opening end setting process in step S206-9-6, the “first variable flag” is turned off and the “big hit end flag” is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and the process for ending the jackpot state can be executed. The “big hit end flag” is state determination information used when determining the end of the big hit state in step S206-9-9.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-5, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has not reached the specified number, a big hit is made in step S206-9-7. A time special prize feed process is performed, and this process ends. Next, the big hit special prize feed processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-9-7-1, the “first variable flag” is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. Note that by turning off the “first variable flag”, if it is a big hit state (S206-6: YES), a negative determination will be made in step S206-9-2. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the “first variable flag” is on), the processing in steps S206-9-3 to S206-9-7 is performed, and the variable winning device 32 is When it is in the closed state (“the first variable flag” is OFF), the processing in S206-9-8 to S206-9-11 is performed.

  After step S206-9-7-1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the “remaining release number counter” in step S206-9-7-2. Subsequently, in step S206-9-7-3, a “first variable timer” setting process is performed. In step S206-9-7-3, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state in the “first variable timer” (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot, a predetermined special prize state) In order to determine whether or not an interval from the end of the period until the next special prize state is started, etc., a value “equivalent to“ 3 seconds ”, for example, a value“ 750 "or" 250 "corresponding to" 1 second ") is set.

  Subsequent to step S206-9-7-3, in step S206-9-7-4, it is determined whether the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” or “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-7-4, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-5, and “xx rounds” is based on the round closure command table (see FIG. 54) stored in the ROM 502. “Closed command” is set (note that “xx” is assigned the current number of rounds, that is, the value of the “opening counter”). After the “xx round closing command” is set, this process ends.

  The “xx round closing command” is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to execute the closing effect that is performed while the variable winning device 32 is closed in the winning state on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is a command. The “xx round closing command” is set in accordance with the number of closings of the variable winning device 32. For example, at the first closing (when the first round ends), the “1 round closing command” is set. In the second closing, a “two-round closing command” is set.

  Furthermore, the “xx round closing command” in the present embodiment is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is configured by information corresponding to the effect during closing, and the lower byte is the value of the “open count counter”, that is, the jackpot It is configured by information indicating the number of times of closing operation (in this embodiment, the value of “opening counter”).

  The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the “xx round closing command” and the closing effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx round closing command”, the display control device 45. Is controlled, the decorative design display device 42 executes the closing effect corresponding to the received “xx round opening command”.

  In the setting process of the “xx round closing command” in step S206-9-7-5, since “16R probability variation jackpot flag” or “8R probability variation jackpot flag” is ON, “CAxx” is set as “xx round closure command”. Is set. After the “xx round closing command” is set, this process ends.

  The sub-control device 262 that has received “CAxx” as the “xx round closing command” controls the display control device 45, so that the display portion 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 has a previous opening effect (“xx A closing effect (for example, see FIG. 69) is performed following the “opening effect that is performed when“ BAxx ”is set as the“ round opening command ”. In other words, when it becomes “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, an effect corresponding to one special prize state is obtained by alternately performing the opening effect and the closing effect on the decorative symbol display device 42. The effect is performed in each round, and the jackpot effect during the jackpot state is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, when “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” is won, different opening effects are performed in each special prize state (each round) of the variable winning device 32. Yes.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-4, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-6, and it is determined whether or not the “2R probability variation big hit flag” is on. If the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S206-9-7-6: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-7, and the “high probability” It is determined whether or not it is “mode”. When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-7 (in the case of “low probability mode”), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-8, where “gaming state determination value Xj” is set. It is determined whether the current production mode is “2”, that is, whether the current production mode is the “time reduction production mode”. If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-8, that is, if the “normal performance mode” or the “latent performance mode” of the “low probability mode” is selected, step S206-9-7-9 is performed. Referring to the round closure command table, “CBxx” is set as the “xx round closure command”. After the “xx round closing command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-7-7 or step S206-9-7-8, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-10, and the round closure command table is referred to. Then, “CDxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”. After the “xx round release command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-6, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-11, and it is determined whether or not the “2R short-term bonus flag” is on. If the “2R short-term bonus flag” is on (S206-9-7-11: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-12, referring to the round closing command table, and “xx “CCxx” is set as the “round closing command”. After the “xx round release command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-11, that is, if it is considered that “2R normal jackpot” has occurred, the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-13, and “game state” It is determined whether or not the determination value Xj is “1” or “3”. When the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-9-7-13: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-7-9. Then, with reference to the round closing command table, “CBxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”, and this processing ends. That is, when the “2R normal big hit” occurs when the production mode is “normal production mode” or “latent production mode”, the previous stage of the ending production indicating the transition to the “latency production mode” Performing in

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-7-13, the process proceeds to step S206-7-9-12. Then, referring to the round closing command table, “CCxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”, and this process ends. In other words, when the “2R normal jackpot” occurs when the production mode is the “time saving mode” or the “probable variation mode”, the same closing effect as when the “2R short jackpot” occurs is performed. Is called.

  In the present embodiment, when “2R probable big hit”, “2R short-time big hit”, or “2R normal big hit”, the opening effect and the closing effect are alternately performed twice on the decorative symbol display device 42. By performing each one, a series of jackpot effects are performed (a distinction between the effect during opening and the effect during closing is impossible or difficult).

  For example, the sub control device 262 that has received “BBxx” as the “xx round open command” and “CBxx” as the “xx round close command” controls the display control device 45 to thereby display the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display unit 42a, the “latency-promising big hit effect” is performed. The “latency-promising jackpot effect” is performed subsequent to the “latent-problem corresponding opening effect” (see FIG. 73), and the effect mode from the next fluctuation is set to the “latent effect effect mode”. If executed. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “latency-probable jackpot effect”.

  Further, for example, the sub control device 262 that has received “BCxx” as the “xx round open command” and “CCxx” as the “xx round close command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol display. On the display unit 42a of the device 42, the “short time corresponding big hit effect” is performed. The “time-saving big hit production” is performed following the “time-saving opening production” (see FIG. 78), and is executed when the production mode from the next fluctuation is set to “time-saving production mode”. Is done. In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 79, an effect of displaying a predetermined character or the like on the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed as the “short time corresponding jackpot effect”.

  Further, for example, the sub-control device 262 that has received “BDxx” as the “xx round open command” and “CDxx” as the “xx round close command” controls the display control device 45 to display the decorative symbol display. On the display unit 42a of the device 42, the “promotion corresponding jackpot effect” is performed. The “promotion corresponding opening effect” is performed subsequent to the “latent probability corresponding opening effect” (see FIG. 73), and is executed when the effect mode from the next change is set to the “probable effect effect mode”. Is done. In the present embodiment, as the “promotion corresponding jackpot effect”, for example, as shown in FIG. 77, an effect of displaying a character or the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  It should be noted that the case classification process (step S206-9-7-4, step S206-9-7-6 to S206-9-7-8, step S206-9-7) in the previous stage of setting the “xx round closing command” -11 and steps S206-9-7-13) are the case classification processing (step S206-8-5, steps S206-8-7 to S206-8-9) in the previous stage of setting the “xx round release command”, This is the same processing as in steps S206-8-12 and S206-8-14). Therefore, the case classification process in the previous stage of setting the “xx round opening command” or the “xx round closing command” is made into a subroutine, and the subroutine process is changed to the big win special prize state start process (step S206-8) and the big win. It may be used in common in the special prize feed process (step S206-9-7). In this case, the data capacity can be reduced.

  Further, the type of “xx round closing command” to be set corresponds to the type of “xx round opening command” (for example, when “BAxx” is set as “xx round opening command”, “xx When “CAxx” is always set as the “round closing command” and “BBxx” is set as the “xx round opening command”, “CBxx” is always set as the “xx round closing command”). That is, in this embodiment, the “xx round release command” and the “xx round close command” that are set are configured such that the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are common information (for example, “xx round release command”). When “BAxx” is set as the “command” and “CAxx” is set as the “xx round closing command”, the lower 4 bits “A” of the upper byte are common). Therefore, in the initial jackpot special prize state start process at the time of jackpot, the common information is acquired by performing the above-mentioned case division process, and the subsequent “xx round opening command” and “xx round closing command” are set. May be configured to use the acquired common information without performing the case division processing. In this case, the processing burden can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, the process proceeds to step S206-9-8, and it is determined whether or not the value of the “first variable timer” is “0”. When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-2, that is, when the “first variable flag” is off, the value of the “first variable timer” is the remaining time of the interval time. Yes. Therefore, the process of step S206-9-8 is a determination process of whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning or during the interval between the special prize states).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-8, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the special prize state, and the timing for proceeding to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the ending effect) has been reached. If YES, the process proceeds to step S206-9-9. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-8, this processing is terminated as it is.

  In step S206-9-9, it is determined whether or not to end the jackpot state in consideration of the “big jackpot end flag”. If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-9, that is, if it is not the end time of the big hit state, the big hit special prize state start process is performed in step S206-9-10, and then this process ends. Note that the jackpot special prize state start process in step S206-9-10 is the same as the process in step S206-8.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-9, the jackpot end setting process is performed in step S206-9-11, and then this process ends.

  In the jackpot end setting process in step S206-9-11, the “big hit middle flag” and the “big hit end flag” are turned off, the “lottery mode flag” switching process, the “support mode flag” switching process, A “counter” setting process, a “gaming state notification command” setting process, an “ending command” setting process, and the like are performed.

  In addition, the “ending command” is displayed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in order to perform an “ending effect” that is performed immediately before the normal game started after the “big hit state” or the “small hit state”. It is output to the control device 262. “Ending effect” is performed, for example, to notify the type of effect mode set after the end of the big win or the small win, the change of the lottery mode, the end of the big win or the small win.

  In the present embodiment, the “ending effect” includes a “probability corresponding ending effect”, a “latent probability corresponding ending effect”, and a “short time corresponding ending effect”.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the “probability-variable ending effect” is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery mode from the next change time becomes the “high probability mode” (in this embodiment, for example, “break mode entry”). In this effect, the player can grasp that the “high probability mode” is assigned from the next fluctuation, and the “ending command”. “EA” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the “latency-probable ending effect” is an effect (in this embodiment, for example, “sales business” indicating that the effect mode from the next change time is the “latent effect effect mode”. This is an effect in which characters such as “mode entry” are displayed. In the “latency-probable ending effect”, it cannot be determined whether the lottery mode from the next change is the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode”. In addition, “EB” is set as the “ending command” when the “latent probability corresponding ending effect” is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the “short time corresponding ending effect” indicates that the player can grasp that the effect mode from the next change time becomes the “short time effect mode”, but the lottery mode is the “high probability mode”. Or “low probability mode” (in this embodiment, for example, an effect in which characters such as “entering training mode” are displayed) and “EC” is set as the “ending command” Is done.

  Here, details of the jackpot end setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S206-9-11-1, the “big hit flag” is turned off. Further, in step S206-9-11-2, the “big hit end flag” is turned off.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-3, and it is determined whether or not the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” or “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is set.

  If the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” or “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is set (S206-9-11-3: YES), the flow proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and the “lottery mode flag” As a flag value of “53”, “53” indicating “high probability mode” is set. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-5, and a value that is virtually unreachable (for example, “99999” corresponding to 99999 variations display) is set as the value of the “support number counter”.

  Furthermore, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-6, and the flag value of the “support mode flag” is set to “A1” indicating that it is “high support mode”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-7, and an “ending command” is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Here, since “8R probability variation jackpot flag” or “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is on, “EA” is set as the “ending command”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-8, and the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “4”. That is, when “8R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot” occurs, the performance mode after the jackpot is set to “probability rendering mode” regardless of the current rendering mode. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and a “gaming state notification command” including the “gaming state determination value Xj” set to “4” is set.

  If neither the “8R probability variation jackpot flag” or the “16R probability variation jackpot flag” is ON (S206-9-11-3: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-10, and “2R It is determined whether or not the “probable variation jackpot flag” is ON. If the “2R probability variation jackpot flag” is on (S206-9-11-10: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-11, and the “high probability mode” is selected with reference to the “lottery mode flag”. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-11, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and the same processing (if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-3) ( S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) are performed.

  On the other hand, if it is not the “high probability mode” (S206-9-11-11: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-12, and whether the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2”. Determine whether or not. If the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” (S206-9-11-12: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-4, and affirmative in step S206-9-11-3. The same processing (S206-9-11-4 to S206-9-11-8) as when the determination is made is performed.

  That is, in this embodiment, when “8R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot” occurs, “2R probability variation jackpot” occurs in “high probability mode”, and “time reduction” of “low probability mode”. When a “2R probability variation jackpot” occurs in the “production mode”, a “high probability mode” and “until next time / high support mode” are given, and the production mode from the next change clearly shows that “probability production” Mode ".

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-12, that is, if the effect mode is “normal effect mode”, or if the effect mode is “low probability mode” and the effect mode is “latent effect effect mode”. If there is, the process proceeds to S206-9-11-13, and “53” indicating “high probability mode” is set as the flag value of the “lottery mode flag”.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-14, and “0” is set to the value of the “support number counter”. Further, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-15, and the flag value of the “support mode flag” is set to “A0” indicating that it is “low support mode”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-16, and an “ending command” is set based on the ending command table. Here, “EB” is set as the “ending command” because the “latent probability effect mode” of the “normal effect mode” or the “low probability mode” and the “2R probability variable big hit flag” is on. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-17, and “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “3”. That is, the effect mode after the big hit is set to the “latent probability effect mode”. Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and a “gaming state notification command” including the “gaming state determination value Xj” set to “3” is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-10, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-18, and it is determined whether or not the “2R short-time bonus flag” is on. Here, when the “2R short-term bonus hit flag” is on (S206-9-11-18: YES), the process proceeds to S206-9-11-19, and the flag value of the “lottery mode flag” is “low”. “50” indicating “probability mode” is set. Furthermore, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-20, and “100” is set as the value of the “support number counter”.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-21, and the flag value of the “support mode flag” is set to “A1” indicating the “high support mode”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-22, and an “ending command” is set based on the ending command table. In this case, since the “2R short and large jackpot flag” is on, “EC” is set as the “ending command”.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-23, and “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “2”. That is, the effect mode after the big hit is set to the “time reduction effect mode”. Then, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-9, and a “gaming state notification command” including the “gaming state determination value Xj” set to “2” is set.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18, that is, if the “2R normal jackpot flag” is on, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-24, and “game state” It is determined whether the determination value Xj is “1” or “3”. When a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, and the effect mode is “time reduction effect mode” or “probability effect effect mode”. If it is, the processing of step S206-9-11-19 to step S206-9-11-23 is performed, and the “gaming state notification command” is set in step S206-9-11-9. . That is, when “2R normal jackpot” occurs in the “short-time effect mode” or “probability variation effect mode”, the same support frequency, lottery mode, etc. are set as when “2R short-time jackpot” occurs.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-9-11-24, that is, if the effect mode is “normal effect mode” or “latent effect effect mode”, step S206-9-11-25. Then, “50” indicating “low probability mode” is set as the flag value of “lottery mode flag”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-14, the processing of steps S206-9-11-14 to S206-9-11-17 is performed, and “game state” is determined in step S206-9-11-9. Notification command "is set. In other words, when “2R normal jackpot” occurs in “normal performance mode” or “latent performance mode”, the support count, support mode, and rendering mode are the same as the support count at the time of winning “2R probability variation jackpot”, etc. However, the lottery mode is set to the “low probability mode” unlike the lottery mode at the time of winning the “2R probability variation jackpot”.

  After setting the “gaming state notification command” in step S206-9-11-9, the process proceeds to step S206-9-11-26, where “big win winning flag” and various “big hit flag” (“16R probability variable big hit flag” etc. ) Is turned off, and this process is terminated.

  Note that the “lottery mode flag” switching setting process (S206-9-11-4, S206-9-11-13, S206-9-11-19, S206-9-11-25) in the main controller 261 is performed. The function to be performed constitutes the mode switching means and the mode determination means in the present embodiment.

  In the above description, the control process in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S206-6 (see FIG. 25), that is, in the case where a jackpot such as “16R probability variable jackpot” occurs in the variable winning control process. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-6, the process proceeds to step S206-10, and it is determined whether or not the “small hitting flag” is on. Then, if a negative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, if both the “big hit middle flag” and the “small hit middle flag” are off, this processing (variable winning device control processing) is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-10, that is, if a small hit has occurred, the processing from step S206-11 is performed. Then, next, the control process when a small win occurs in the variable winning control process will be described.

  First, in step S206-11, it is determined whether or not the value of the “open count counter” is zero. Here, when the value of the “opening counter” is 0 (S206-11: YES), that is, when the variable winning device 32 has never been opened after the small hit has occurred, the step The process proceeds to S206-12. In step S206-12, “0” is set as an initial value in “winning counter Vx”. As described above, in the case of a big win, the “winning counter Vx” is reset every time the variable winning device 32 is opened or closed (S206-8-2). The initial value is set in the “winning counter Vx” only once before, and the “winning counter VX” is not reset in the subsequent opening / closing operation. In other words, at the time of a big win, the “winning counter Vx” measures the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 in one opening / closing operation (special prize state). The total number of winning game balls for 32 is measured.

  Now, following the setting process of the “winning counter Vx” in step S206-12, in step S206-13, a small win special prize state start process is performed. The small hit special prize state start process corresponds to the big hit special prize state start process described above when a small hit occurs. In the special prize state start process for the small hitting time, a setting process of “first variable flag” and “first variable timer” necessary for the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is performed, and an “xx opening eye command” to be described later is set. Settings are made. Here, the small hit special prize state start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-13-1, the “first variable flag” is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S206-13-2, and 1 is added to the “opening number counter”. For example, in the first small hitting special prize state start processing at the small hitting time, 1 is added to the initial value (0) of the “opening number counter”, and the “opening number counter” is updated to 1.

  After step S206-13-2, the process proceeds to step S206-13-3, and setting processing of the “first variable timer” is performed with reference to the open / close pattern control table (see FIG. 51). In step S206-13-3, the maximum opening time per opening / closing operation corresponding to the small hit is set in the “first variable timer”. In the present embodiment, “100” is set in the “first variable timer”, and the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening / closing operation in the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is set to “0.4 seconds”. The

  After setting the “first variable timer”, the process proceeds to step S206-13-4, and it is determined whether or not the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”. Here, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-13-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-13-5, and the open eye stored in the ROM 502 is displayed. Based on the command table [see FIG. 56 (a)], the “xx opening eye command” setting process is performed (note that “xx” indicates the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened since the small hit occurs, that is, , The value of “open count counter” is substituted). After the “xx opening eye command” is set, this process is terminated.

  The “xx opening eye command” corresponds to the “xx round opening command” set at the time of big hit, and is set only at the time of small hit. In the present embodiment, the “xx opening eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round opening command”. In other words, the “xx opening eye command” is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is constituted by information corresponding to the opening effect, and the lower byte is the value of the “opening counter”, that is, the number of times in the small hit. It is composed of information indicating whether the operation is an opening operation (in this embodiment, the value of the “opening counter”). Further, since the “xx open eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round open command”, the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx open eye command”, the control process, and the “xx round open command”. There is no difference from the control processing when the “release command” is received, and the same processing is performed. Furthermore, the “xx opening eye command” is set according to the number of opening times of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable prize-winning device 32. For example, “1 opening eye command” is set for the first opening, and “ “2nd open command” is set.

  The sub-control device 262 stores a relationship between the “xx opening eye command” and the opening effect, and the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx opening eye command” and displays the display control device 45. By controlling this, the decoration symbol display device 42 executes an effect corresponding to the received “xx opening eye command”.

  In the setting process of “xx opening eye command” in step S206-13-5, since “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, “BBxx” is set as “xx opening eye command”. The After the “xx opening eye command” is set, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-13-4, that is, if the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, the process proceeds to step S206-13-6, “BCxx” is set as the “xx opening eye command”. After the “xx opening eye command” is set, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 25, when a negative determination is made in step S206-11, or after the small hitting special prize state start process of step S206-13, the process proceeds to step S206-14 and the small hitting time variable winning device control process I do. Next, the small winning time variable winning device control process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-14-1, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the “first variable timer”.

  In the subsequent step S206-14-2, whether or not the value of the “winning counter Vx” is equal to or larger than the maximum possible winning number M1, that is, the total number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state is the maximum possible winning number. It is determined whether or not M1 (“10” in this embodiment) has been reached. If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-2, the "first variable flag" is turned off in step S206-14-3, and the "small hit end flag" in step S206-14-4. Is turned on, and a small hitting end setting process described later in step S206-14-5 is performed to end the present process. In other words, at the big win, the open / close operation is always performed for the preset number of times in the variable winning device 32, and then the big win state ends, but at the small win, the number of winning game balls to the variable winning device 32 is the maximum. Even if the open time of the variable winning device 32 remains at the stage where the winning number M1 is reached or the remaining number of open times of the variable winning device 32 is not 0 (the “remaining open number counter” is 0), The small hit state is configured to end.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-2, that is, if the value of the “winning counter Vx” has not reached the maximum possible winning number M1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-6, It is determined whether or not the “1 variable flag” is ON. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the processing in steps S206-14-7 to S206-14-10 is performed.

  More specifically, first, in step S206-14-7, whether or not the count value of the “first variable timer” is “0”, that is, the opening time per opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not “0.4 second” is left. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if the timing for setting the variable prize-winning device 32 to the closed state has not yet arrived, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-7, that is, if it is time to close the variable winning device 32 (currently open), the flow proceeds to step S206-14-8. , It is determined whether or not the counter value of the “remaining open number counter” is “0”, that is, whether or not the number of executions of the special prize state has reached the specified maximum number (2 times).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-8, an open end setting process is performed in step S206-14-9, and this process ends. In the opening end setting process of step S206-14-9, the “first variable flag” is turned off and the “small hit end flag” is turned on. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed, and the process for ending the small hit state (S206-14-5) can be executed. The “small hit end flag” is state determination information used when determining the end of the small hit state in step S206-14-12.

  If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-8, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state has not reached the prescribed maximum number, in step S206-14-10, a small hit special prize feed process is performed. The process ends. Next, the small hit special prize feed processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S206-14-10-1, the “first variable flag” is turned off. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is closed. Note that by turning off the “first variable flag”, if it is a small hit state (S206-10: YES), a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6. That is, when the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (the “first variable flag” is on), the processing in steps S206-14-7 to S206-14-10 is performed, and the variable winning device 32 is When it is in the closed state (“the first variable flag” is OFF), the processing in steps S206-14-5 and S206-14-11 to S206-14-13 is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 32, after step S206-14-10-1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the “remaining open number counter” in step S206-14-10-2. Subsequently, in step S206-14-10-3, a “first variable timer” setting process is performed. In step S206-14-10-3, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state in the “first variable timer” (for example, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the small hit, In order to determine whether or not the interval from the end of the state to the start of the next special prize state has passed, etc., a predetermined value (for example, “1 second”) is referred to the above open / close pattern control table (see FIG. 51). "250") corresponding to "" is set.

  Subsequent to step S206-14-10-3, in step S206-14-10-4, it is determined whether or not the “game state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”. Here, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3” (S206-14-10-4: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-10-5 and is stored in the ROM 502. Based on the closed eye command table [see FIG. 56 (b)], the setting process of the “xx closing eye command” is performed (“xx” indicates the variable winning device 32 after the small hit has occurred. The number of times of opening, that is, the value of the “number of times of opening counter” is substituted). After the “xx closing eye command” is set, this process ends.

  The “xx closing eye command” corresponds to the “xx round closing command” set at the time of jackpot, and is set only at the time of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the “xx closing eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round closing command”. In other words, the “xx closing eye command” is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is made up of information corresponding to the effect during closing, and the lower byte is the value of the “opening counter”, that is, how many times during the small hits It is configured by information indicating the closing operation (in this embodiment, the value of “opening counter”). Further, since the “xx closing eye command” has the same configuration as the “xx round closing command”, the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx closing eye command”, the control process, and the “xx round closing command”. There is no difference in the control process when the “close command” is received, and the same process is performed. Further, the “xx closing eye command” is set in accordance with the number of closings of the variable winning device 32. For example, in the first closing, “1 closing eye command” is set, and in the second closing, “2 closing eye command” is set. Is set.

  The sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between the “xx closing eye command” and the closing effect in a table, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx closing eye command”, the display control device 45. Is controlled, the decorative design display device 42 executes the closing effect corresponding to the received “xx closing eye command”.

  In the setting process of “xx closing eye command” in step S206-14-10-5, since “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, “CBxx” is set as “xx closing eye command”. Is set. After the “xx closing eye command” is set, this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-10-4, that is, if the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2” or “4”, step S206-14-10-6 is performed. Then, “CCxx” is set as the “xx closing eye command”. After the “xx closing eye command” is set, this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when “small hit” is achieved, similarly to the case of “2R probability variation big hit” or the like, the decorative design display device 42 alternately performs the opening effect and the closing effect. In this way, a series of small hitting / directing effects (in which the distinction between the opening effect and the closing effect is impossible or difficult) is executed.

  For example, the sub-control device 262 that has received “BBxx” as the “xx opening eye command” and “CBxx” as the “xx closing eye command” controls the display control device 45, thereby displaying the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display unit 42a, for example, the following small hitting effect is performed. That is, the small hitting effect at this time is an effect executed immediately before the ending effect indicating the transition to the “latent effect effect mode”, as shown in FIG. This is the same effect as the “medium jackpot effect” when “2R probability variation jackpot” or the like occurs.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 that has received “BCxx” as the “xx opening eye command” and “CCxx” as the “xx closing eye command” controls the display control device 45, whereby the decorative symbol display device 42. In the display unit 42a, for example, the following small hitting effect is performed. In other words, the small hitting effect at this time is an effect that is executed immediately before the ending effect indicating the transition to the “short-time effect mode” as shown in FIG. This is the same effect as the “Large Bonus Production” in the event of “2R short and big jackpot” or the like.

  In this embodiment, in the “xx open eye command” and “xx close eye command” to be set, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured as common information (for example, “xx open eye command”). When “BCxx” is set as the “command” and “CCxx” is set as the “xx closing eye command”, the lower 4 bits “C” of the upper byte are common. Therefore, in the first small hitting special prize state start processing at the small hitting time, the common information is acquired by performing the case division processing (S206-13-4), and the subsequent “xx opening eye command” and “ In setting the “xx closing eye command”, the acquired common information may be used without performing the case division processing (S206-13-4, S206-14-10-4). In this case, the processing burden can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 31, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, the process proceeds to step S206-14-11, and it is determined whether or not the value of the “first variable timer” is “0”. To do. When a negative determination is made in step S206-14-6, that is, when the “first variable flag” is off, the value of the “first variable timer” is the remaining time of the interval time. Yes. Therefore, the process of step S206-14-11 is, so to speak, a determination process of whether or not it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after completion of the winning or during the interval between the special prize states).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-11, that is, a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state, and the timing for proceeding to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the ending effect) has been reached. If YES, the process proceeds to step S206-14-12. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S206-14-11, this processing is terminated as it is.

  In step S206-14-12, it is determined whether or not to end the small hit state in consideration of the “small hit end flag”. If a negative determination is made in step S206-14-12, the small hit special prize state start process is performed in step S206-14-13, and then the present process ends. Note that the small hitting special prize state start processing in step S206-14-13 is the same as the processing in step S206-13.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-12, after the small hit end setting process is performed in step S206-14-5, the present process is terminated.

  In the small hitting end setting process in step S206-14-5, the “small hitting middle flag” and the “small hitting end flag” are turned off, and the “gaming state notification command”, “ending command”, “return counter”, Setting processing of “return flag” and “return processing suggestion command” is performed.

  Note that the “return process suggestion command” is a “return process suggestion effect” that suggests the execution of “return process (return effect)” in the decorative symbol display device 42 during normal fluctuation after the small hit state. This is output to the sub-control device 262. The “return process suggestion effect” is performed to suggest to the player that the “return process (return effect)” is executed. In the “return processing suggestion effect”, for example, an effect in which a predetermined display object (for example, a character or the like) that does not appear in the normal “short time effect mode” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 42, the function of the main control device 261 for performing the process of setting the “return processing suggestion command” and the display control device 45 is controlled when the “return processing suggestion command” is received. The function of the sub-control device 262 that performs the “return processing suggestion effect” and the decorative symbol display device 42 that performs the “return process suggestion effect” constitute a second information transmission unit.

  Next, the “small hit end setting process” in step S206-14-5 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S206-14-5-1, it is determined with reference to the “lottery mode flag” whether or not the “high probability mode”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-1, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-2 to determine whether or not the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “4”. To do. That is, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the “probability change effect mode”.

  Here, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “4” (S206-14-5-2: YES), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-3, and “return flag” Turn on. When the “return flag” is turned on, that is, when “small hit” occurs when the production mode is “probable production mode”, the production mode is temporarily “high probability mode”. It is set to the “short time effect mode” in which it is not possible to determine whether or not. However, as described above, the return process is executed after the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, and the process returns to the “probability changing effect mode” that clearly indicates the “high probability mode”.

  Subsequently, in step S206-14-5-4, a "return counter" setting process is performed. As described above, the “return counter” is a numerical value that defines the occurrence timing of the return processing to the “probability changing effect mode”. After the “return flag” is set, when the same number of fluctuation displays as the “return counter” are displayed, the return process (S205-16-8) is executed, and a return to the “probable change effect mode” occurs. Will be.

  In addition, as an initial value of the “return counter”, a value based on counters (such as a hit random number counter C1, a big hit type determination counter C2, and a reach selection counter C3) used when the main controller 261 performs processing is set. . In the present embodiment, for example, a numerical value obtained by adding “1” to the numerical value stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer (the value of the jackpot type determination counter C2) is set as the initial value of the “return counter”. That is, any one of “1-50” is randomly set as the “return counter”. The initial value of the “return counter” may be set based on another counter such as a hit random number counter C1 or a reach selection counter C3. Further, a predetermined numerical value may be set as the initial value of the “return counter”. The initial value of the “return counter” is preferably set to a value equal to or less than the number of continuous times (100 times) of the “high support mode” in the “time reduction mode”. For example, the initial value of the “return counter” is the same as the number of continuations of the “high support mode” in the “short-time mode”, and the “return effect” is the same timing as the transition to the “normal effect mode” in the “short-time mode”. May be executed to return to the “probability effect mode”.

  After step S206-14-5-4, in step S206-14-5-5, whether or not the value of the “winning counter Vx” is 1 or more, that is, in the small hit state, the game for the variable winning device 32 It is determined whether or not a ball has been won. Here, when the value of the “winning counter Vx” is 1 or more (S206-14-5-5: YES), a “return processing suggestion command” is set in step S206-14-5-6, Control goes to step S206-14-5-7. On the other hand, when the value of the “winning counter Vx” is less than 1 (S206-14-5-5: NO), the “return processing suggestion command” is not set and step S206-14-5 is performed. Move to 7. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state not only acquires the game ball but also provides the player with a profit such as the execution confirmation of the “return processing suggestion effect” after the small hit, By confirming the execution of the “effect”, the player can grasp that the process returns to the “probability changing effect mode” before executing the return process.

  In the subsequent step S206-14-5-7, an “ending command” is set. The “ending command” is set based on the ending command table (see FIG. 55). Specifically, the “ending command” is selected from the ending command table based on the “gaming state determination value Xj”, the “lottery mode flag”, the various “big hit flag”, and the “small win flag”. In step S206-14-5-7, “gaming state determination value Xj” is “4” and “small winning flag” is on, so “EC” is set as the “ending command”. . When “EC” is set as the “ending command”, the “time reduction corresponding ending effect” is displayed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the same manner as in the case where “2R time shortfall hit” occurs in the “probability change effect mode”. Is executed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-8, where “2” is set as “gaming state determination value Xj”. That is, when “small hit” occurs in the “probability changing effect mode”, the effect mode after the small hit is set to the “short-time effect mode”. Thereafter, a “gaming state notification command” is set in step S206-14-5-9. Next, in step S206-14-5-10, the “small winning flag” is turned off, and this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the “gaming state determination value Xj” is not “4” in step S206-14-5-2 (S206-14-5-2: NO), the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-11. It is determined whether or not the “game state determination value Xj” is “3”, that is, whether or not the current performance mode is the “latent performance mode”. When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-11, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-12, and an “ending command” is set based on the ending command table. In step S206-14-5-12, since “gaming state determination value Xj” is “3” and “small winning flag” is on, “EB” is set as the “ending command”. . Then, after setting the “gaming state notification command” in step S206-14-5-9 and turning off the “small winning flag” in step S206-14-5-10, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is not “3” in step S206-14-5-11 (S206-14-5-11: NO), that is, the effect mode is “time reduction effect mode” (“game” If the state determination value Xj "= 2) and the" high probability mode "is set, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-13. In step S206-14-5-13, an “ending command” is set based on the ending command table. Here, since “gaming state determination value Xj” is “2”, “high probability mode” and “small winning flag” is on, “EC” is set as “ending command” The Then, after setting the “gaming state notification command” in step S206-14-5-9 and turning off the “small winning flag” in step S206-14-5-10, the process is terminated.

  When a negative determination is made in step S206-14-5-1, that is, when a small hit occurs in the “low probability mode”, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-14, and “game” It is determined whether or not the state determination value Xj is “1” or “3”.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206-14-5-14, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-15, and an “ending command” is set based on the ending command table. Here, since the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” or “3”, the “low probability mode” is set, and the “small winning flag” is on, the “ending command” is “EB” Is set. Furthermore, in step S206-14-5-16, the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set to “3”. In other words, the production mode from the next change time is set to the “latency production mode”. Then, after setting the “gaming state notification command” in step S206-14-5-9 and turning off the “small winning flag” in step S206-14-5-10, the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S206-14-5-14, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-17, and the “ending command” is set to “EC”. Then, after setting the “gaming state notification command” in step S206-14-5-9 and turning off the “small winning flag” in step S206-14-5-10, the process is terminated.

  Note that, in the “small hit end setting process” (S206-14-5) described above, unlike the “big hit end setting process” (S206-9-11), the value of the “lottery mode flag” is not changed. The value of the “lottery mode flag” at the time of occurrence of the small hit is maintained as it is. That is, when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery (when “small hit” occurs), the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is. For example, when the “high probability mode” is set before occurrence of the small hit state (when the flag value of the “lottery mode flag” is “53”), the “high probability mode” is not changed after the small hit. (The flag value “53” of the lottery mode flag) is maintained.

  Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON / OFF state of the “first variable flag”. When the “first variable flag” is on, a control signal for opening the big prize opening 32a is output to the variable prize winning device 32, and the big prize opening 32a is opened. On the other hand, when the “first variable flag” is off, a control signal is output to the variable winning device 32 to close the special winning opening 32a, and the special winning opening 32a is closed.

  Further, in the variable winning device control process, when a big hit occurs, the big hit special prize feed process in step S206-9-7, the opening end setting process in step S206-9-6, and steps S206-8 and S206- In the 9-10 jackpot special prize state start processing, the “first variable flag” is alternately switched. As a result, during the jackpot, the opening / closing process in the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the opening number of the variable winning device 32 reaches the specified number of times (2, 8, or 16 times).

  On the other hand, when a small hit occurs, normally, a small hit special prize feed process in step S206-14-10, an open end setting process in step S206-14-9, and steps S206-13 and S206- In the small hit special prize state start process of 14-13, the “first variable flag” is switched alternately. Thus, during the small hit, the opening / closing process in the variable winning device 32 is normally repeated until the number of opening of the variable winning device 32 reaches the prescribed maximum number (two times). However, the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 is forcibly ended when the total number of winning game balls for the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state becomes equal to or greater than the maximum possible winning number M1.

  Note that the “opening command” set in the above-described change end setting process (S205-16) and the “xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)” set in the variable winning device control process (S206), The “xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)”, “ending command”, and “gaming state determination value Xj” after the end of the hit are shown in FIG. 57 in each “gaming state determination value Xj” and “lottery mode”. As shown. In FIG. 57, “opening command”, “xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)”, “xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)”, “ending command” and “game state determination set after hitting” It is shown in the order of “value Xj”.

  That is, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “1” (when the effect mode is “normal effect mode” or when the “game state determination value Xj” is “3” (the effect mode is “ In the case of “2R probability big hit”, “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” when the lottery mode is “low probability mode” and the lottery mode is “low probability mode” “Opening command”, “xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)”, “xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)”, “ending command” and “game state determination value Xj” are set. In this case, the “support mode flag” is changed or maintained to “low support mode” and the symbols displayed at the time of change stop are the same (a combination of special symbols) It is.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), after the same stop symbol is displayed, "latent probability corresponding opening effect", "latent probability corresponding jackpot effect" and "latent probability corresponding ending effect" are performed, Next, the “latent performance mode” is given with the “low support mode”. Therefore, the player determines whether the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” (whether “2R probability change big hit” has occurred) from the effect such as the opening effect, the effect mode after the winning end, the stop pattern at the time of winning, etc. It is impossible to determine whether the mode is “low probability mode” (whether “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” has occurred).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the “gaming state determination value Xj” is “4” (the effect mode is “probability effect mode”), or the “game state determination value Xj” is “2”. Yes (when the production mode is the “short-time production mode”) and the lottery mode is the “high probability mode”, when “2R short-time big hit”, “2R normal big hit” or “small win” occurs Are set with the same “opening command”, “xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)”, “xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)”, “ending command” and “gaming state determination value Xj”, respectively. Is done. Further, in this case, the “support mode flag” is maintained in the “high support mode”, and the symbols displayed when the change is stopped are the same (combination of the prescribed symbols).

  Accordingly, the lottery mode is maintained in the “high probability mode” when the “small hit” occurs, while the lottery mode is the “low probability mode” when the “2R short hit big hit” or “2R normal big hit” occurs. As shown in FIG. 58 (b), between the time of “small hit” and “2R short junior big hit” etc., as shown in FIG. There is no difference in the stop symbols, and they are the same. Further, in the present embodiment, when “2R junior big hit” or the like occurs, the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and when “small hit” occurs, the decorative symbol is displayed. On the display device 42, dummy information in the same manner as the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed. Therefore, the player cannot discriminate whether the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” or the “low probability mode” based on the opening effect, the effect mode at the time of change, or the like.

  However, in the case of shifting to the “short-time effect mode” with a jackpot such as “2R short-time jackpot”, if the jackpot is not won, the “normal-play mode” is displayed after a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) of change display. However, when the transition to the “short time effect mode” is made with a small hit, the return to the “probable effect effect mode” is performed after the return effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, when “2R normal big hit” or “small win” occurs, the same “opening command” and “xx round open command (xx open eye command)” in each effect mode. , “Xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)”, “ending command” and “gaming state determination value Xj” are set. In addition, the symbols displayed when the change is stopped are the same (combination of specified symbols). On the other hand, when the “2R normal big hit” occurs, the lottery mode shifts (falls) to the “low probability mode”, but when the “small hit” occurs, the current lottery mode is maintained as it is. Accordingly, for example, when “2R normal big hit” or “small win” occurs in the “latent performance mode” of the “high probability mode”, the winning lottery mode is maintained in the “high probability mode”. It is not possible to judge whether it has shifted to the “low probability mode” or not. Therefore, the player can expect to maintain the “high probability mode”, and can enjoy the fun that has never existed while being excited. In this respect, the interest can be dramatically improved.

  Now, returning to the normal process of FIG. 10, following the variable winning control process of step S206, a second display control process is executed in step S207. In this processing, the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are set as to what kind of control is performed in the normal symbol display device 41. Next, the second display control process in step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S207-1, whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the variable display by looking at the setting status of the “second display flag” indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the variable display. Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the “second display flag” is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the “second display flag” is off, the normal symbol display is performed. It is considered that the device 41 is in the stop display corresponding to the state where the variable display is stopped.

  If a negative determination is made in step S207-1, the process proceeds to step S207-2 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the variable display is not being performed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is larger than “0”, the process proceeds to step S207-3. In step S207-3, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In a succeeding step S207-4, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  Thereafter, in step S207-5, start setting processing is executed. In this process, the normal symbol display device 41 performs a process indicating that the condition for performing the variable display is satisfied. Specifically, the “second display flag” is turned on, and the “second display timer” setting process is performed. The “second display timer” is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. It is considered when doing.

  In the present embodiment, during the “low support mode”, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds. Therefore, referring to the “support mode flag”, if the “low support mode” is set, “500” is set in the “second display timer”. In the “high support mode”, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds. Therefore, referring to the “support mode flag”, when the “high support mode” is set, “100” is set in the “second display timer”. Then, after step S207-5 ends, the second display control process ends.

  Based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting the variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output process of the normal processing, the normal symbol display device 41 changes Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display “O” or “X” as the normal symbol.

  If the determination in step S207-1 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S207-6 to perform second display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the “second display timer” is decremented by 1.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S207-7, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the “second display timer” is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S207-7, the "second display flag" is turned off in step S207-8, and the normal symbol stop for displaying the stop on the normal symbol display device 41 in step S207-9. Configure display settings. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. That is, in the case of winning, the “◯” symbol (winning symbol) is stopped (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being off, the “x” symbol is stopped.

  As described above, it is determined whether or not the winning is made based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation holding area. Specifically, among the values 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter C4, the winning value is one “0” in the “low support mode” and eight “0 to 7” in the “high support mode”. It is.

  After the normal symbol stop display setting in step S207-9, the process proceeds to step S207-10 to perform a change end time setting process, and this process ends. In the setting process at the time of the variation process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for performing the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37 is performed. Specifically, the “second variable flag” is turned on, and the opening time is set in the “second variable timer”.

  The “second variable flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not the electric accessory 37 is open.

  The “second variable timer” is a means for measuring the opening time (residual time) of the electric accessory 37, and is used when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the opening of the opening. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the electric accessory 37 is different between the “high support mode” and the “low support mode”, and “1000” is set for the second variable timer in the “high support mode”. In the “low support mode”, “100” is set for the second variable timer.

  When a negative determination is made in step S207-7, in step S207-11, a switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this process is terminated. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, “×” is displayed, and if “×”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control processing, that is, every 4 msec.

  Returning to FIG. 10, after the end of the second display control process in step S207, the process proceeds to step S208, and the electric accessory control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the electric accessory 37 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the electric accessory 37. Next, the electric accessory control process in step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S208-1, it is determined whether or not a “second variable flag” indicating whether or not the electric accessory 37 is in an open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the “second variable flag” is not on (the electric accessory 37 is in the closed state), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S208-1, that is, if the “second variable flag” is on, the electric accessory 37 is considered to be open, and the second variable timer subtraction is performed in step S208-2. Process. Each time this process is performed, the value of the “second variable timer” is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S208-3, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the “second variable timer” after the subtraction. Here, when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the “second variable timer” becomes “0”, the determination in step S208-3 is affirmative. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S208-3, the process proceeds to step S208-4, and an end setting process is performed in step S208-4, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step S208-4, a process of turning off the “second variable flag” is performed.

  Various control signals are output to the electric accessory 37 in the next external output process of the normal process based on the on / off state of the “second variable flag”. When the “second variable flag” is on, a control signal for opening the movable blade 37a is output to the electric accessory 37, and the electric accessory 37 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the “second variable flag” is OFF, a control signal for closing the movable blade 37a is output to the electric accessory 37, and the electric accessory 37 is closed. Thereby, it becomes impossible to win a game ball in the lower start winning opening 33B.

  Returning to FIG. 10, following the electric accessory control process in step S <b> 208, in step S <b> 209, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503 a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S210 whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time from the start of the previous normal processing (this embodiment) It is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S211, step S212).

  That is, in step S211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches an upper limit value (398 in this example).

  In step S212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, and to change similarly. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Now, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S209: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S213 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S213, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S214, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S215. To remember. Thereafter, in step S216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S217, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S218, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  The process of step S209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of steps S211 and S212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Further, since the interruption processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is shut off and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 36, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawing, the process starting with S5 is assigned to the process by the payout control device 311.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S501, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S502. The “command reception flag” is turned on, and this reception interrupt process ends. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the stored pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the next received command is stored in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S551) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The “command reception flag” may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control apparatus 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S511, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S512, RAM access is permitted, and in step S513, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S514, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S515, and in step S516, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored at the time of power interruption. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  When the power failure occurrence information is not set at step S514 (S514: NO), or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) at step S516 (S516: NO). Then, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S523.

  In step S523, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S524, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S525, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S522 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in step S514 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S516 (S514: YES, S516: YES) Executes power processing (processing when power is restored). In other words, the stack pointer before power-off is restored in step S517, the power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S518, and the “payout permission flag” that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S519. In step S520, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S521, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S522, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S522, it is determined in the process of step S526 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply has been cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S527 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S527, and the command determination process is executed in the next step S528.

  Next, command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process, first, in step S528-1, it is determined whether or not the “command reception flag” is turned on. The “command reception flag” is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

  If it is determined in step S528-1 that the “command reception flag” is off (S528-1: NO), a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S528-1 that the “command reception flag” is ON (S528-1: YES), the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S528-2, and “command reception” is determined in step S528-3. Turn off the flag. By turning off the “command reception flag” in step S528-3, the processing of steps S528-2 to S528-11 can be skipped until a new command is received, thereby reducing the control burden on the payout control device 311. You can also.

  In step S528-4 to step S528-6, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S528-4, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a “payout initialization command”. In step S528-5, it is determined whether or not it is a “payout return command”. In S528-6, it is determined whether or not it is a “prize ball command”.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a “payout initialization command”, it is determined in step S528-7 whether or not the “payout permission flag” has already been turned on, and the “payout permission flag” is turned off. If so (S528-7: NO), the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the main controller 261 when the power is turned on, so that the work area (area) other than the RAM 513 stack area in step S528-8. Is cleared to 0, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S528-9. After that, in step S528-11, the “payout permission flag” is turned on, and the payout of prize balls is set.

  As described above, the main control device 261 transmits the “payout initialization command” (step S111), and then performs initialization processing (steps S112 and S113) of the RAM 503. The payout control device 311 Since the initialization process of the RAM 513 (steps S528-8 and S528-9) is performed after the "initialization command" is received (step S528-4), the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the RAM 513 are initialized. The timing is almost the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the “payout permission flag” is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the “payout permission flag” has already been turned on in step S528-7, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S528-7 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the “payout permission flag” set. The “payout initialization command” is a command that is transmitted only when the payout control device 311 is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. In such a case, it is possible that the payout control device 311 recognizes it as a “payout initialization command” due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the clearing of the work area of the RAM 513 (step S528-8) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S528-9) are executed in a state where the “payout permission flag” is turned on, a prize ball remains. In this case, the player may lose money due to a bad effect such as not being paid out. However, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the “payout permission flag” is turned on, The loss can be prevented.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “payout return command” (S528-4: NO, S528-5: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 are in a state before the power is shut off. Since it returns, the “payout permission flag” is turned on in step S528-11 in order to permit the payout of the prize ball. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the winning ball is permitted. When the “payout permission flag” is turned on in the process of step S528-11, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is placed in the next storage area. The corresponding read pointer is updated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “prize ball command” (S528-5: NO, step S528-6: YES), the received prize ball number is set to the total prize ball in step S528-10. The “payout permission flag” is turned on in step S528-11 to add the number to the number and store it, and to permit the payout of the prize ball. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads “prize ball commands” stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and determines the number of prize balls corresponding to the command as the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. Add to and store. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the “prize ball command” transmitted from the main controller 261, the “prize ball command” is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . Further, when the “prize ball command” is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that it is possible to pay out the prize ball at an early stage for winning. When the “payout permission flag” is turned on in the process of step S528-11, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer corresponds to the next storage area. The read pointer is updated.

  It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a “payout initialization command” (S528-4: NO), is not a “payout return command” (step S528-5: NO), and is a “prize ball command”. If not (step S528-6: NO), the command determination process is terminated without turning on the “payout permission flag”.

  Returning to FIG. 37, following the command determination processing in step S528, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S529, and the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S530. In step S531, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. In step S532, the RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  In the process of step S526, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed after the process performed when the power is turned on. Therefore, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S551, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed. Note that the command determination process is the same process as step S528 described above.

  When the command determination process ends, in step S552, it is determined whether or not the “payout permission flag” is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the “payout permission flag” is not turned on, the present process is terminated. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S552, a launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S553, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S554, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. With this process, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, for example, when the payout motor is clogged, the payout motor is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). .

  Thereafter, in step S555, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full state is performed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower pan 15 is determined to be full according to the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the setting of the lower pan full state is executed, and the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S556, the setting of the tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or the tank ball absence state (ball presence state) is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball absence state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch. When there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball absence state is executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S557, for example, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S558, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S559, and a motor drive process is performed in step S560.

  In step S561, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In the subsequent step S562, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawing, the processes starting with S7 are assigned to the processes in the sub-control device 262.

  First, in step S701, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S702. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261.

  The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, It is configured to return to the beginning and update the command. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S703, a command determination process is performed. Here, the command determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S703-1, the received command is read from the command buffer of the RAM 553. In a succeeding step S703-2, the type of the command is determined.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is an “initialization command”, the initialization of the RAM 553 is instructed from the main control device 261 when the power is turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step S703-3. In step S703-4, the initial value of the RAM 553 is set. As a result, the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value “1” of the “game state determination value Xj” corresponding to the “normal effect mode” that is the initial setting. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “return command”, the main control device 261 returns to the state before power-off, so that the sub-control device 262 that does not have a backup function performs step S703-5. Then, the value (any one of “1” to “4”) of the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the return command is read and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “gaming state notification command”, in the same manner as when the transmitted command is a “return command”, in step S703-5, the “gaming state notification” The “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the “command” is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “hold control command”, in step S703-6, various information included in the “hold control command” (a jackpot determination information, a jackpot type information, a start winning port 33A, 33B is stored in the sub-variation hold area, and the process ends.

  The sub fluctuation holding area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261. That is, the sub-variation holding area includes a first sub-variation holding area corresponding to the upper start winning port 33A, a second sub-variation holding area corresponding to the lower start winning port 33B, and one sub execution area. Each of the two sub-variable holding areas has four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas).

  In each holding area, the reception history (reception order) of the “holding control command” and the winning history of the game ball included in the “holding control command” (whether it is based on the winning to the start winning opening 33A or 33B) Etc.), information related to the variable display executed by the decorative symbol display device 42 (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) is stored in time series. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of suspended display and the contents thereof.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a “symbol command”, a symbol setting process is performed in step S703-7, and this process ends.

  In the symbol setting process in step S703-7, the symbol stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 44) of the RAM 553 described later is displayed as a decorative symbol display based on the hit type information stored in the reserved area of the sub-variable reserved area. The stop symbol displayed on the device 42 is set in the sub execution area.

  More specifically, when “B1” is set in the “symbol command”, the combination of symbols of any one of the first, third, fifth, seventh and ninth symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when “B2” is set in the “symbol command”, a combination of symbols 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol. When “B3” is set in the “symbol command”, the combination of symbols stored in the front / rear reach symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol. When “B4” is set in the “symbol command”, a combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer is determined as a stop symbol other than front-rear deviation. When “B5” is set in the “symbol command”, the combination of symbols stored in the completely out of symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “B6” is set in the “symbol command”, a combination of symbols in which a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined as a stop symbol. When “B7” is set in the “symbol command”, the combination of the specified symbols is determined as the stop symbol. When “B6” is set in the “symbol command”, the symbols to be displayed in the upper symbol display area and the symbols to be displayed in the lower symbol display area are displayed by the sub-control unit 262 by the front / rear reach symbol buffer. Alternatively, the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear deviation are selected.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a “variation pattern command”, it is the timing for starting the variation display on the decorative symbol display device 42, so start setting processing is performed in step S703-8, and step S703. Move to -9.

  In the start setting process in step S703-8, various settings related to the variable display performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed.

  In this start setting process, first, similarly to the case of the special variable hold area of the main control device 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub variable hold area to the sub execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the variation time corresponding to the received “variation pattern command” is set in the “variation display timer”. The “variable display timer” is means for measuring a variation time (residual time for variation display) in the decorative symbol display device 42, and is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the beginning of the variation display.

  Further, in the start setting process, a “fluctuating display flag”, which is considered when determining whether or not the fluctuating display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, is turned on.

  Further, in the start setting process, based on the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the received “variation pattern command”, the effect modes (“normal effect mode”, “time reduction effect mode”, “ ("Latent probability effect mode" or "probability variation effect mode") is determined, and the variation pattern related to the symbol variation display is determined based on the variation pattern information (variation mode) stored in the "variation pattern command". In addition, a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variation time is determined based on the hit type information (including “off”). Information regarding the variation pattern, the production mode (“game state determination value Xj”), and the stop symbol determined here are added to the sub execution area of the sub variation holding area. The RAM 553 that stores the “game state determination value Xj” included in the “variation pattern command” constitutes the mode information storage means in the present embodiment. The correspondence relationship between the variation time information and the variation pattern in each effect mode and the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type information and the stop symbol are stored in a table in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262.

  That is, in the sub-control device 262 as well as the main control device 261, a variation pattern corresponding to “16R probability variation jackpot”, a variation pattern corresponding to “8R probability variation jackpot”, a variation pattern corresponding to “2R probability variation jackpot”, “ Variation pattern corresponding to “2R short-range big hit”, fluctuation pattern corresponding to “2R normal big hit” or “small hit”, fluctuation pattern corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”, fluctuation pattern corresponding to “reach other than front / rear out of reach”, and A plurality of table groups respectively corresponding to the values “1” to “4” of the “gaming state determination value Xj” are stored for the variation pattern corresponding to “completely missed”.

  Then, when determining the variation pattern in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 determines the effect mode (“gaming state” from the plurality of table groups based on the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the variation pattern command. A table corresponding to values “1” to “4” of determination value Xj ”is selected. Next, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the selected table.

  Further, in the start setting process, the sub-control device 262 displays “support” transmitted from the main control device 261 when the effect mode is “time-short effect effect mode” (“game state determination value Xj” is “2”). Based on the value of the “count counter”, a command to be transmitted to the display control device 45 is set in order to display the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given in the decorative symbol display device 42. However, even if the production mode is the “short-time production mode”, when the “lottery mode” is the “high probability mode” (in addition, it is determined whether or not it is the “high probability mode” in the sub-control device 262. This is performed based on a command including the “lottery mode flag” transmitted from the main control device 261), and the sub control device 262 itself measures the number of times of reception of the “variation pattern command” after the “short-time effect mode”. In addition, information corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is obtained based on the number of times of measurement. Then, based on the obtained information, the sub-control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to display information that is visible on the surface for the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given. . Note that this information has nothing to do with the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is actually given, and is so-called dummy information. Further, the set command is output to the display control device 45 in an external output process S710, which will be described later. The display control device 45 controls the decorative design display device 42, so that the command output in the decorative design display device 42 is output. The display corresponding to is made. Also, instead of the information related to the remaining number of changes to which the “high support mode” is given or the dummy information of the remaining number of changes, the total number of changes in the “high support mode”, or the total number The dummy information may be displayed.

  Subsequent to the start setting in step S703-8, in step S703-9, the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the “variation pattern command” and the “gaming state determination value stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are displayed. It is determined whether or not “Xj” matches. Here, if both values match, the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the two values are different, the “status error flag” is turned on in step S703-10, and “game state determination” included in the newly received “variation pattern command” in step S703-11. The value “Xj” is regarded as appropriate, and the “game state determination value Xj” is stored in the game state information storage area. Thereafter, this process is terminated. When the “status error flag” is turned on, the error display lamp 104 or the like notifies that the two values are different. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and may be configured to perform error notification by the decorative symbol display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

  In addition, since the main control devices and the like have a backup function in recent gaming machines, even when the power is cut off due to a power failure etc., various data including the lottery mode at that time can be stored and retained, Even if the power is shut off during the “high probability mode”, the player can resume the game while in the “high probability mode” when the power is restored.

  However, if the above backup function is used, an act of setting the gaming machine to the “high probability mode” from the start of business in the game hall, the so-called “morning” becomes possible. Such an action is performed for the game hall to increase the ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk of mischief about the player's gambling. Various methods are conceivable as the setting method of the above action. As an example, there is a method in which the gaming machine whose lottery mode is the “high probability mode” at the end of business on the previous day is not initialized and reset. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, information related to the effect mode (“game state determination value Xj”) in the display means such as a liquid crystal display device is transmitted from the main control device to the sub-control device. In a configuration transmitted by a “return command” or the like, if the cable connector connecting the main control device and the sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, the sub-control device is actually set by the main control device. The effect mode cannot be grasped, and control related to the default effect mode, that is, the “normal effect mode” is performed.

  In a general gaming machine, when a presentation is performed in a display presentation unit such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color) is changed between “low probability mode” and “high probability mode”. This makes it easy for players and the like to grasp the current lottery mode.

  In general, a sub-control device that controls a liquid crystal display device or the like does not have a backup function. Therefore, when the power is turned off, control related to the default effect mode (“normal effect mode”) is performed. .

  Therefore, if this is used, it is possible to set the effect mode of the liquid crystal display device to the effect mode at the normal time even though the actual lottery mode set by the main control device is the “high probability mode”. In such a case, the current lottery mode cannot be easily determined at a glance by looking at the liquid crystal display device or the like, so that it is substantially difficult to confirm this action by a predetermined survey or the like.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as described above, the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the “variation pattern command” and the “gaming state determination value Xj” stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 If they are different, an error notification is made to that effect, and the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the newly received “variation pattern command” is stored in the gaming state information storage area. That is, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate rendering mode at that time. As a result, the action such as “morning” is performed, and the effect mode in the sub-control device 262 is the effect at the normal time even though the actual lottery mode set by the main controller 261 is the “high probability mode”. Even if it is an aspect, when the “variation pattern command” is received, it is notified that the effect mode is different, and corresponds to the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the received “variation pattern command” This is the production mode. As a result, the action such as “morning” by the game hall can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is an “opening command”, an opening effect setting process is performed in step S703-12, and this process is terminated.

  In the opening effect setting process in step S703-12, when “AA” is set in the transmitted “opening command”, the sub control device 262 executes “16R probability variation corresponding opening effect” in the decorative symbol display device 42. Set the command to be executed. If “AB” is set in the “opening command”, a command for executing the “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect” is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, and “AC” is set in the “opening command”. Is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, a command for executing the “latency corresponding opening effect” is set. Further, when “AD” is set in the “opening command”, a command for executing the “opening effect corresponding to time reduction” is set in the decorative symbol display device 42.

  On the other hand, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “xx round opening command” or “xx opening eye command”, in-step effect setting processing is performed in step S703-13, and this processing is terminated. In step S703-13, the sub control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted “xx round release command (xx release eye command)”.

  If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “xx round closing command” or “xx closing eye command”, a closing effect setting process is performed in step S703-14, and this process is terminated. In step S703-14, the sub control device 262 sets a command corresponding to the type of the transmitted “xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)”.

  It should be noted that a command set based on the “xx round opening command (xx opening eye command)” and a command set based on the “xx round closing command (xx closing eye command)” are external output processing described later. In S710, the data is output to the display control device 45. Then, the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the input command, and causes the ornamental symbol display device 42 to perform a big hit / small hit effect.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is an “ending command”, an ending effect setting process is performed in step S703-15, and this process is terminated.

  In the ending effect setting process of step S703-15, the sub control device 262 executes a “probability change corresponding ending effect” on the decorative symbol display device 42 when “EA” is set in the “ending command”. Set. When “EB” is set in the “ending command”, a command for executing the “latent probability corresponding ending effect” is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, and “EC” is set in the “ending command”. Is set in the decorative symbol display device 42, a command for executing the “short time corresponding ending effect” is set.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a “return effect command”, a return effect setting process is performed in step S703-16, and this process ends. In the return effect setting process in step S703-16, the sub control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute the “return effect”.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a “return process suggestion command”, a return effect setting process is performed in step S703-17, and this process ends. In step S <b> 703-17, the sub control device 262 sets a command for causing the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute a “return processing suggesting effect”.

  A command set corresponding to the “opening command”, “ending command”, “return effect command”, or “return process suggestion command” is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process S710, which will be described later, and displayed. As the control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol display device 42 produces effects (opening effect, ending effect, return effect, etc.) corresponding to the output command. In the present embodiment, when the display control device 45 receives a command corresponding to the “ending command” when the big hit effect or the small hit effect is in the middle, the display control device 45 stops these effects and performs the ending effect. It is configured as follows.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, after step S703 or when a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S704, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process Whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed is determined. If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S704: YES), the process proceeds to step S705. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process (S705: NO). Then, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S705, various counter updating processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the off-set symbols of the big symbol decoration symbol counter C5, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is for determining a symbol (a jackpot symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in the case of “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”. In this embodiment, five types of odd symbols and five types of even symbols are set as the jackpot symbol. Accordingly, five (0 to 4) counter values are prepared as the big hit decoration symbol counter C5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter C5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and reaches 0 to the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the “symbol command” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “B1” indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, for example, a counter is used based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with symbols). If the value is 0, it is “1” (the flat eye), 1 is “3” (the flat eye), 2 is “5” (the flat eye), 3 is “7” If it is 4, the combination of the odd number big hit symbols is determined, such as “9” (the doublet).

  Further, when the “symbol command” transmitted from the main control device 261 is “B2” indicating the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with symbols), for example, a counter If the value is 0, it is “0” (the flat eye), 1 is “2” (the flat eye), 2 is “4” (the flat eye), 3 is “6” If it is 4, the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is determined, such as “8” (the doublet).

  The jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is periodically updated in the counter update process in step S705, and when the sub-control device 262 receives the “symbol command” as described above, the counter buffer of the RAM 553 receives the symbol command. The stored value of the big hit time decorative symbol counter C5 is read out. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter C5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553. However, it is not stored in the buffer, but the counter value is referred to when the “symbol command” is received. You may make it do.

  The top, middle and bottom off symbol counters CL, CM and CR determine the stop symbols (combinations of off symbols) in the top, middle and bottom symbol display areas when the winning lottery is “out”. Since each of the 10 symbols is displayed in each column, 10 (0 to 9) counter values are prepared for each column. The stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the up / down symbol counter CL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle / off symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the bottom / off symbol counter CR. Is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the front / rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out, and It is stored in one of the completely off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each off symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 42, in step S751, it is determined whether it is time to update the up / down symbol counter CL, and in step S752, it is determined whether it is time to update the middle / out symbol symbol CM. The upper, middle, and lower outlier counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down / out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S751. If the up / down symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S752.

  If it is time to update the up / down symbol counter CL (step S751: YES), the process proceeds to step S753, where the up / down symbol counter CL is updated. If it is the time to update the middle / outgoing symbol counter CM (step S752: YES), the process proceeds to step S754, and the middle / outlier symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if the update timing of the down / out symbol counter CR (S751: NO, S752: NO), the process proceeds to step S755, and the down / out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S753 to S755, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the update process of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the up, middle, and lower outlier counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update process, and each counter value is updated. The times do not overlap. As a result, every time the update process is executed three times, the set symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated for one set.

  After that, in step S756, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas And the symbol in the middle symbol display area are different from each other), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (S756: YES), in step S757, it is a back and forth reach. It is determined whether or not there is. When the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front / rear out of reach (front / rear out symbol) (S757: YES), the process proceeds to step S758, and the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. Is stored in the front / rear reach reach symbol buffer.

  On the other hand, if the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach other than front / rear disengagement (design other than front / rear disengagement) (S757: NO), the process proceeds to step S759, and the out symbol counters CL, CM at that time , CR are stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the anteroposterior deviation of the RAM 553.

  If the combination is other than the reach symbol (S756: NO), the process proceeds to step S760, where it is determined whether the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR has become a symbol combination. If it is a combination of symbols (completely deviated symbols) (S760: YES), the process proceeds to step S761, and the combination of deviated symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely deviated symbol buffer of the RAM 553. If both steps S756 and S760 are NO, the symbols are aligned at the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. In such a case, the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR are used as buffers. This process is terminated without storing. Further, even when the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the specified symbols, the present process is terminated without storing the out symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of specified symbols that are stopped and displayed in the case of “2R short junior bonus” is one pattern combination (“2”, “4”, “6”). It is not necessary to use the counter information when displaying the symbols.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, following step S705, the variable display setting process of step S706 is performed. The variation display setting process is a process for mainly performing a variation display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42. Next, the variation display setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in step S706-1, the setting state of the “fluctuating display flag” is checked to determine whether or not the decorative symbol display device 42 is performing variable display. Specifically, if the “Fluctuation Displaying Flag” is set (on state), it is regarded as a variable display, and if the “Fluctuation Displaying Flag” is canceled (off state) Therefore, it is considered that the stop display corresponding to the state in which the variable display is stopped is being performed. As described above, the “variable display flag” is turned on when the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started (in the start setting process of step S703-8), and the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. Is turned off (in the stop display setting of step S706-5 described later).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S706-1, that is, if the change starts or is changing, the process proceeds to step S706-2. If a negative determination is made in step S706-1, this process is terminated. .

  In step S706-2, change display timer subtraction processing is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the “variation display timer” is decremented by one. As described above, the “variation display timer” is set when the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started (in the start setting process of step S703-8). Further, the normal process in the sub-control device 262 is performed every 1 msec, and the value of the “variation display timer” is decremented by 1 every elapse of 1 msec. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec) , “10000” is set for the “variable display timer”.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S706-3, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in consideration of the value of the “fluctuation display timer” after the subtraction. At this time, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S706-3.

  If a negative determination is made in step S706-3, in step S706-4, a change execution process for executing the change display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed, and this process ends.

  In this variable execution process, for example, various arithmetic processes such as generating a “display command” to be output to the display control device 45 based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variable holding area of the RAM 553, and command output setting I do.

  As a result, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts a variable display of symbols on the decorative symbol display device. In addition to the change execution process, the effect mode (“normal effect mode”, “time reduction effect mode”, “latent effect effect mode” or “probability change effect mode”) in the decorative symbol display device 42 is switched. That is, effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 to various modes is configured by the sub control device 262 that executes the variation execution process S706-4. Moreover, the display control apparatus 45 comprises an effect control means.

  Furthermore, once the “variation pattern command” is received from main controller 261, the variation display variation time corresponding to the “variation pattern command” has elapsed (set in the start setting process in step S706-8). Until the value of the “variation display timer” becomes “0”), the symbol variation display is continued under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S706-3, that is, if it is determined that the value of the “variable display timer” is “0”, a stop display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in step S706-5. The stop display setting for performing is performed, and this processing ends. In the stop display setting, the “variable display flag” is released (turned off), and a “stop command” for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is set.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 40, in the lamp setting process in step S707 following the variable display setting process in step S706, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set to be synchronized with the display effect performed in the decorative symbol display device 42. .

  In the sound setting process in step S708, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S708.

  In step S709, other processing such as control setting of a waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses when the decorative symbol display device 42 has not been changed and displayed) is performed. Do.

  In step S710, external output processing for transmitting a control signal based on the settings in steps S703 to S709 to each device is executed. For example, a command set corresponding to the “opening command” is transmitted to the display control device 45 at the opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, a “display command” is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the symbols.

  After the processing of steps S705 to S710 performed every 1 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S704, the process proceeds to step S711, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Determine whether. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a “power interruption command” is received from the main controller 261.

  When the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S712, and it is determined whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 has not been destroyed (S712: NO), the process returns to step S701, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed (S712: YES), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes.

  If it is determined in step S711 that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S711: YES), a power-off process is executed in step S713. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  Next, the display mode and the like on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 will be described together with the flow of the game by the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the display unit 42 a of the decorative symbol display device 42 is set with a variable display region W <b> 1 including three symbols, upper, middle, and lower, in the normal state. In addition, an instruction display area W2 for instructing (recommending) a game ball firing mode to the player is set below the fluctuation display area W1, and further, the number of suspension of the variable display is shown below the fluctuation display area W1. A hold display area W3 is set.

  The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b corresponding to the first sub variable hold area and the second sub variable hold area. In the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) are displayed, respectively.

  The hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a light-off mode during normal times (when not held) (see the shaded portion), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined hold area, The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reserved areas are configured to be switched and displayed in the lighting mode (see white circles).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the first hold image TA1 and the second hold image TA2 in the first hold display area W3a are displayed in a lighting manner, and the remaining holding images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are turned off. The displayed state is shown. That is, the variable display is held in the hold first area and the hold second area of the first sub-variable hold area, and the number of hold of the current change display is “2” states related to the upper start winning opening 33A. It is shown.

  In the “low support mode”, an instruction display is displayed so as to recommend an action of the player launching a game ball toward the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as “left-handed”). “← Left” is displayed in the area W2. Following this, the player “left-hands” and plays the game. The left side region of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes the first region in the present embodiment.

  In the case of “left-handed”, most of the game balls are guided toward the upper start winning opening 33A located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nail or the like. Among them, how many game balls will win the upper start winning opening 33A.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33B (electric accessory 37) flows down the right side region of the variable display device unit 35, that is, the left side region of the variable display device unit 35. The game balls that have been played are placed at unreachable positions. Further, in the “low support mode”, the probability of winning the open lottery of the lower start winning opening 33B (the electric accessory 37) is relatively low at 1/10. In addition, the game ball that has flowed down the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 is configured to be hardly guided to the upper start winning opening 33A by the nail or the like. That is, in the present embodiment, in the “low support mode”, the player performs an action of firing a game ball toward the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as “right-handed”). In this case, it is difficult to win the start winning ports 33A and 33B. Therefore, in the “low support mode”, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by playing “left-handed” and playing the game. The right side area of the variable display device unit 35 constitutes the second area in the present embodiment.

  When the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, in the variable display area W1 of the decorative symbol display device 42, a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed for each of the symbol display areas. In the present embodiment, symbols Z with numbers “1” to “9” are displayed. The various symbols Z are scrolled and displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of symbol strings.

  In such a case, in the upper symbol display area, various symbols Z are displayed in descending order (the order in which the attached numbers decrease), and in the middle symbol display region and the lower symbol display region, various symbols Z are also in ascending order (labeled). (In order of increasing numbers). When a predetermined time elapses, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and the symbol Z is stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

  If you win a winning lottery based on the winning of a game ball to the top start winning opening 33A and win a “16R probable big win” or “8R probable big win”, you will reach the jackpot on the predetermined jackpot line through the reach state The combination of the symbols Z (double-rows arranged in a line) is stopped and displayed. In the normal state of the present embodiment (“normal effect mode” and “latent effect effect mode”), the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines ( Called 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, when three symbols Z of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed side by side on any of the five lines, “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation” The occurrence of “big hit” is confirmed.

  When “16R probability variation jackpot” is won, a “16R probability variation corresponding opening effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIGS. 62 to 66, and a jackpot state is generated. In addition, when “8R probability variation jackpot” is won, “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64 and FIG. A condition occurs. In the present embodiment, the “16R probability variation corresponding opening effect” and the “8R probability variation corresponding opening effect” are part of a common effect, and therefore the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, you may comprise so that the number of rounds provided in a jackpot state may be displayed by "opening effect".

  After the “16R probability change corresponding opening effect” or “8R probability change corresponding opening effect” is finished, the open / close plate 32b of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened, and the game ball can enter the big prize opening 32a. The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b is performed by the number (16R or 8R). Further, in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, when the opening / closing plate 32b is opened, an effect during opening as shown in FIG. 68 is performed, and when the opening / closing plate 32b is closed, it is shown in FIG. Such a closing effect is performed. An effect during mid-opening and an effect during closing are alternately performed, whereby the effect during a predetermined jackpot is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the current round is displayed in the big hit effect (open effect). In the present embodiment, the production in the first half (production up to the 8th round) of the jackpot / medium production performed when “16R probability variation jackpot” occurs is performed when “8R probability variation jackpot” occurs. This is the same as the production of the jackpot. Accordingly, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is disposed in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach). When the player continues “left-handed”, it is difficult to win the game ball to the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, in the opening effect, the effect indicating the jackpot type (“16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”) and the jackpot effect are displayed in the instruction display area W2. “Right-handed →” is displayed so that a person recommends an action (“right-handed”) of launching a game ball toward the right side region of the variable display device unit 35. Accordingly, the player plays a jackpot game by switching from “left-handed” to “right-handed” so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and goes to the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. .

  Here, when “right-handed” is made, most of the game balls are guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails or the like and won to the variable winning device 32. Thereby, the player can acquire more game balls.

  When the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b in the variable winning device 32 is executed for a predetermined number of rounds, as shown in FIG. 70, the “probability-variable ending effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. Then, the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change is set to the “probability change effect mode” (for example, see FIG. 71). Furthermore, the lottery mode is set to “high probability mode” and “until next time / high support mode” is given.

  In a state where the “high support mode” is given, a display recommending “right-handed” is made in the instruction display area W2. The through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33B (the electric accessory 37) is arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35, and in the “high support mode”, the lower start winning opening 33B. The probability of winning the open lottery of the (electric component 37) is relatively high (in this embodiment, the winning probability is set to 8/10). Therefore, by making “right-handed”, many of the game balls are likely to win the lower start winning opening 33B, and the number of jackpot lotteries increases, and the ball has a good state.

  If the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B is won and “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” is won, the upper start is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42. An effect similar to that in the case of winning a lottery based on winning of a game ball at the winning opening 33A is performed. In addition, when “16R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot” is selected, the decoration symbol from the next variation is applied regardless of the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decoration symbol display device 42 at the time when the jackpot occurs. The effect mode in the display unit 42a of the display device 42 is set to the “probability change effect mode”.

  When the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the upper starting winning port 33A or the lower starting winning port 33B is won and “2R probable big hit” is won, a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area as shown in FIG. ZS is stopped and displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 73, the “latent probability corresponding opening effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, and a big hit state is generated.

  In the big win state, while the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, twice) in a relatively short time, in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, Following the “latency-promising opening effect”, a jackpot effect is performed. Then, the ending effect is executed following the jackpot effect. Here, in this embodiment, depending on the production mode (value of “gaming state determination Xj”) and the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”) at the time of winning “2R probability variation jackpot” The production mode and the ending production, and the production mode from the time of the next change are different.

  Specifically, when the production mode is the “normal production mode”, or when the production mode is the “latent production mode” in the “low probability mode”, the “2R probability variation jackpot” is won, During the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. Then, following this jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 75, a “latency corresponding ending effect” is executed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 as shown in FIG. Further, following the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the next change is set to the “latent effect effect mode”. In addition, the lottery mode is set to “high probability mode” and “low support mode” is given.

  On the other hand, when the production mode is the “short-time production mode” or the “probability production mode”, or when the production mode is the “latent production mode” in the “high probability mode”, “2R probability variation big hit” is won. In this case, following the “latency-probable opening effect”, during the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 32, as shown in FIG. Executed. Next, in the display unit 42a, a “probable ending-compatible effect” (see FIG. 70) is executed as the ending effect. 71). Furthermore, the lottery mode is set to “high probability mode” and “until next time / high support mode” is given.

  When winning the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B and winning the “2R junior college bonus”, as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the prescribed symbols is stopped and displayed. In the part 42a, a “short time corresponding opening effect” is performed, and a big hit state is generated. While the opening / closing of the open / close plate 32b of the variable prize-winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, twice) in a relatively short time, the display unit 42a receives a big hit as shown in FIG. As a production, a “short-time jackpot production” is executed. Then, following this jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 80, a “short time corresponding ending effect” is executed on the display unit 42a as the ending effect. Further, after the ending effect (after the end of the big hit state), as shown in FIG. 81, the effect mode in the display unit 42a from the next change time is set to the “short-time effect mode”. In addition, the lottery mode is set to “low probability mode” and “100 times / high support mode” is given.

  Note that, when “2R short-time big win” is won, the production mode from the next change is set to “short-time production mode” regardless of the production mode at the time of the big win. In addition, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given is displayed on the display unit 42a.

  In addition, when “2R short junior big hit” is won, “high support mode” is given, so “right-handed” is displayed in the instruction display area W2 at the time of the opening effect, the ending effect, and the like. Is displayed. In addition, in addition to or instead of the instruction display area W2, immediately before starting the normal game (for example, an ending effect), “right-handed” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 from the start of the next fluctuation. Recommended display may be performed.

  If you win the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the top start winning opening 33A and win the “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot”, the special symbol ZS is displayed in the middle symbol display area through the reach state. May be displayed in a stopped state, or a combination of symbols may be displayed in a stopped state. After the stop display of the symbols, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 performs an opening effect, a jackpot effect, and an ending effect, but the effect mode at the time when “2R normal jackpot” or “small bonus” is won ( Depending on the value of “game state determination Xj”, the stop pattern, the opening effect, the jackpot effect, the ending effect, and the effect mode from the next change are different.

  Specifically, when the “2R normal big hit” or “small win” is won when the production mode is “normal production mode” or “latent production mode”, as shown in FIG. After the state, the special symbol ZS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 73, the display unit 42a executes a “latency-prone opening effect” as an opening effect. Furthermore, while the opening / closing plate 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed in a relatively short period of time (in this embodiment, a maximum of 2 times), as shown in FIG. As the production, the “latency-promising jackpot production” is executed. As shown in FIG. 51, the open / close pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same for both the “2R normal big win” win and the “small win” win. Then, following the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 75, a “latency corresponding ending effect” is executed on the display unit 42a as the ending effect.

  Subsequent to the ending effect, as shown in FIG. 76, the effect mode in the display unit 42a from the next change time is set to the “latent effect effect mode”. If “2R normal jackpot” is won, the lottery mode will be set to “low probability mode” and “low support mode” will be given at the time of fluctuation from the next time, but “small hit” will be given. In the case of winning, the current lottery mode and support mode are maintained as they are. However, since “low support mode” is given in “normal performance mode” or “latent performance mode”, even if “small bonus” is won, “2R normal big bonus” is won Similarly, the support mode from the next change is the “low support mode”. Since the “low support mode” is given, a display recommending “left-handed” in the next normal game is made in the instruction display area W2.

  Furthermore, as described above, when “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot” is won in “normal performance mode” or “latent performance mode”, the stop symbol, opening effect, jackpot effect, ending effect, variable prize The opening / closing pattern of the device 32 and the effect mode from the next change are the opening effect when “2R probability variation big hit” is won in the “latent probability effect mode” of the “normal effect mode” or “low probability mode”, etc. Is the same. Therefore, when the production mode is the “normal production mode”, the stop symbol and the variable prize winning device 32 are selected when “2R probable big hit” is won and when “2R normal big win” or “small win” occurs. There is no difference in the opening / closing pattern, the winning effect (opening effect, jackpot effect, and ending effect), the winning effect mode and the support mode. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the “2R probability variable jackpot” or “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot” based on the display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 and the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It will be. Therefore, the player can expect the winning of “2R probability variation jackpot” and consequently the transition to the “high probability mode”, and can improve the interest.

  In addition, as described above, when the production mode is “normal production mode” or “latent performance production mode”, if “2R normal big hit” or “small win” is won, The effects are the same, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is the same, and the effect mode and the support mode from the next change are also the same. Therefore, the player cannot distinguish whether “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” has occurred based on the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 or the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. . Therefore, when the above-described performance corresponding to “2R normal big hit” or “small win” is made in the “latent performance mode” in which the “high probability mode” can be set, the player generates a “small hit” However, it is difficult to determine whether the “high probability mode” can be expected to be maintained or “2R normal jackpot” has occurred, and whether the lottery mode has become the “low probability mode”. Therefore, even if the player is actually in the “low probability mode”, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation that it is in the “high probability mode”.

  In addition, as one of the winning modes, while using the same effects as the “2R probability variation jackpot”, etc., the “2R normal jackpot” for shifting the lottery mode to the “low probability mode” is provided. The occurrence frequency of “2R probability variation big hit” may be further increased. More specifically, by providing “2R normal jackpot”, even if “2R probability variable jackpot” is won and “high probability mode” becomes “latent performance mode”, “2R normal jackpot” is set at this time. By winning, it is possible to shift (fall) to the “low probability mode”. In other words, the presence of “2R normal jackpot” may cause a transition (fall) to the “low probability mode” in the “latent probability effect mode” of the “high probability mode”. Therefore, in consideration of this possibility, the occurrence frequency of “2R probability variation jackpot” may be increased. By increasing the occurrence frequency of “2R probable big hit”, when the same production corresponding to “2R probable big hit”, “2R normal big hit” and “small hit” is performed, the winning of “2R probable big hit” Can be expected more, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Returning to the explanation of the opening effect in the case of winning “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot”, when it is “short time effect mode” or “probable effect mode”, “2R normal jackpot” or “small jackpot” In the case of winning, as shown in FIG. 78, the combination of the prescribed symbols is stopped and displayed, and the “shortening corresponding to time reduction” is performed on the display unit 42a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79, while the opening / closing of the open / close plate 32b of the variable prize-winning device 32 is performed a predetermined number of times (maximum of two in the present embodiment) in a relatively short time, the display unit 42a is hitting a big hit As a production, a “short-time jackpot production” is executed. Further, following the jackpot effect, as shown in FIG. 80, a “short-time ending effect” is executed as the ending effect, and after the ending effect (after the end of the jackpot state), the next time as shown in FIG. The effect mode in the display unit 42a from the time of the change is set to “time reduction effect mode”. In addition, the lottery mode is set to the “low probability mode” when the “2R normal jackpot” is won, while the current lottery mode is maintained when the “small jackpot” is won. Furthermore, as a support mode, “100 times high support mode” is given when “2R normal jackpot” is won, but the current support mode is maintained as it is when “small hit”. However, in the normal game after the “small hit” end, the “high support mode” is set based on the information obtained by the sub-control device 262 and indicating the total number of fluctuations since the “short-time effect mode”. Dummy information is displayed on the display unit 42a as if the remaining number of fluctuations to be given is shown. This information is displayed in the same manner as the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given, which is displayed at the time of winning “2R normal jackpot”. It is impossible to distinguish whether “2R normal big hit” or “small hit” has occurred.

  As described above, since the “high support mode” is given in the “short-time effect mode” and the “probability change effect mode”, the player can advantageously play the game by performing “right-handed”. It is like that. As described above, at the time of “right-handed”, it is difficult for a game ball to be awarded to the upper start winning opening 33A. Accordingly, the “2R normal jackpot” that is generated only by winning the game ball at the upper start winning opening 33A is very unlikely to occur in the “short-time effect mode” or “probability effect mode”, but the probability of occurrence is not completely absent. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “2R normal jackpot” is won in the “short-time effect mode” or “probability effect mode”, the stop symbol, the winning effect, the lottery mode and the support mode in the normal game after winning, It is configured to be the same as those when winning the “2R junior college bonus”. In other words, the “2R normal jackpot” winning in the “short-time effect mode” or “probability effect mode” is configured to be treated in the same manner as the “2R short-time jackpot” win. Therefore, when “2R normal jackpot” is won in “normal performance mode” or “latent performance mode”, it is switched to “low support mode”, but “high support mode” is given. When “2R normal jackpot” is won in the “time reduction effect mode” or “probability effect effect mode”, the “high support mode” is maintained. This prevents the support mode from being switched to the “low support mode” (“the high support mode” is suddenly discontinued) due to the winning of “2R normal jackpot”, and prevents a decrease in interest for the player. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 is “probable effect effect mode”, when “2R short-time big hit (2R normal big hit)” is won, “small hit” There is no difference in appearance in the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32, the winning effect, the winning effect mode, and the number of support between the time of winning and the player wins, and the player is "2R short-time big hit" (2R normal big hit) It is impossible to determine whether the player has been won (whether “low probability mode” has been selected) or “small hit” has been won (whether the “high probability mode” has been maintained).

  Note that, as described above, in the present embodiment, the “small hit” success / failure lottery is performed only by winning the top start winning opening 33A. During the “short-time mode” in which the “high support mode” is given or during the “probability change mode”, the player usually makes a “right-handed”, which is why the “small hit” win-win lottery is triggered. Winning to the upper start winning opening 33A is unlikely to occur. That is, in the present embodiment, the “small hit” is unlikely to occur during the “short time mode” or the “probability change mode”.

  Now, when the production mode is the “probable production mode”, “small hit” occurs, and when the production mode becomes the “short-time production mode”, the display returns to the “probability production mode” after a predetermined number of fluctuation displays. Will occur. That is, after a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, a “return effect” is performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a character that is the same as the character displayed at the time of “16R probability variation jackpot”, that is, a character that is displayed when a game state that is more advantageous to the player appears. As a result, the player has an expectation that an advantageous state may be brought about. Then, following the display of the character, as shown in FIG. 83, a character or the like that clearly indicates returning to the “probability changing effect mode” is displayed. As a result, the player feels a pleasant surprise and a sense of happiness that the above-mentioned expectation has become a reality and the player has entered the “probability mode” again.

  Then, after the “return effect”, as shown in FIG. 71, the effect mode in the next variable display is set to the “probable effect effect mode”. In addition, the “up to next time / high support mode” is maintained as the support mode. In this embodiment, the process of turning on the “return flag”, the process of setting the “return counter”, and the “return counter” are subtracted, and the “return effect command” is set after the specified number of fluctuations are displayed. Function of the main control device 261 for performing the processing to perform and the sub-control device for performing the “return effect” in the decorative symbol display device 42 by controlling the display control device 45 when the “return effect command” is received. The information transmission means is constituted by the function 262 and the decorative symbol display device 42 in which the “return effect” is performed.

  Further, when a winning game ball is won against the variable prize winning device 32 during the “small hit” win in the “probability change effect mode”, a “return process suggestion effect” that suggests the occurrence of the “return effect” is performed. . More specifically, in the “return processing suggestion effect” in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, reach is performed from the beginning of entering the “short-time effect mode” after the small hit until the “return effect” is executed. The same character that is displayed at the time of “16R probable big hit” (characters that are displayed when some kind of advantageous situation is caused to the player), such as when the pattern changes or when the change stops, etc. Is displayed on the display unit 42a. The “return processing suggestion effect” displayed by this character reduces the feeling of disappointment of “falling to the short time mode (falling to an unfavorable state)” for the player, and an advantageous state occurs. You will get a sense of expectation that it may be, and a sense of security that an advantageous situation has been committed. Thereafter, a “return effect” is performed, and the player returns to the “probable change effect mode”, thereby obtaining a satisfaction and a great sense of happiness that the expectation that the player had had become reality.

  As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, when the production mode is the “probability variation production mode”, when “2R short-time big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) or “small hit” occurs, The effect modes from the next change time are the same (in this embodiment, both are the “short-time effect mode”).

  Conventionally, when “small hit” occurs when the production mode is the “probable variation production mode”, the production mode in the next variable display remains “probability production mode” In general, it is a production mode that gives a sense of expectation that the “high probability mode” is maintained. Therefore, the player considers that the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” in the normal game after the occurrence of the “small hit”, similarly to the case before the occurrence of the “small hit”. Therefore, even if a “small hit” occurs when the production mode is the “probable variation production mode”, the player is not given any special uplifting feeling or satisfaction. In other words, in the “probability variation mode” where a big hit is likely to occur, the player expects a “big hit” to occur, and even in this state, even if a “small hit” occurs, there is a particular satisfaction. On the contrary, there is a risk of damaging interest. In other words, the “small hit” in the “probability changing effect mode” in the related art may not contribute to the improvement of the gameability, and may become “useless”.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when “2R short jackpot” (“2R normal jackpot”) or “small jackpot” occurs in the “probability rendering mode”, the rendering mode from the next change is the same. “Time reduction mode”. Here, in the “probability change effect mode”, the probability of jackpot occurrence is high (the lottery mode becomes “high probability mode”), so the player in the “probability change effect mode” usually expects “many appearances” The game is played with a sense of excitement and expectations. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot that is most advantageous to the player in the “probability change mode” (“16R probability change jackpot”) is likely to occur, the feeling of uplifting and expectation is very large. On the other hand, the winning of “2R short-term jackpot” in “Probability-changing mode” means a fall from “High probability mode” to “Low probability mode”. ”To“ short-time production mode ”usually causes the above-mentioned uplifting feeling and expectation that the player had to suddenly dissipate, creating a great disappointment that“ the high-probability mode has ended ”. It will be given to the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the feeling of uplifting and expectation tends to increase, the feeling of disappointment can also become very large. In view of this point, in this embodiment, even when “small hit” in which “high probability mode” is maintained occurs, “2R short-time big hit” (“2R normal hit”) that shifts to “low probability mode” occurs. Even in the case where “big hit”) occurs, the effect mode is similarly shifted to the “short-time effect mode”. That is, even if a hit occurs in the “probability changing effect mode” and the “probability changing effect mode” is changed to the “time reduction effect mode”, the “high probability mode” may be maintained. Then, for the player, since the same production mode is achieved after hitting, a “small hit” occurs and the “high probability mode” is maintained, or “2R short time big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) Occurs, and it becomes difficult to determine whether the lottery mode has shifted from the “high probability mode” to the “low probability mode”. Therefore, for the player, the feeling of disappointment that it has shifted to the “low probability mode” will be relatively less, and the game will have enough expectation that the “high probability mode” is still maintained. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest for the player. In other words, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by using “small hits” that may become “wasted” in the past.

  In addition, it is executed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 when “2R short-time big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) or “small win” occurs when the production mode is the “probable variation production mode”. The effect, the number of times of support, the stop symbol at the time of winning, and the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 are configured to be the same. Therefore, the player has a “small hit” and the “high probability mode” is maintained, or “2R short-term big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) occurs, and the lottery mode is “high probability mode”. It is even more difficult to determine whether or not the mode has shifted to “low probability mode”. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest for the player.

  In addition, in the past, it is common to individually prepare effects (ending effects, etc.) that are made when a “small hit” occurs when the effect mode is “probability effect effect mode”. It takes time and effort. Here, it is necessary to create and prepare an effect with a high execution frequency even if labor is required from the viewpoint of making the game less tired and improving the game performance. In addition, high-value production for players (for example, premium reach production that occurs only at the time of big hits, although the frequency of occurrence is low) stimulates the player's curiosity and enhances the gameability. Need to create and prepare. However, the performance with low execution frequency and low value for the player does not contribute much to the improvement of the game performance, although it takes labor to create it. In other words, the production performed when the “small hit” occurs when the production mode is the “probable variation production mode”, takes into account the degree of improvement in game play brought about by the production. Is not preferred.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the “small hit” winning / losing lottery occurs only by winning the top start entrance 33A, and when the production mode is the “probability variation production mode”, the player usually performs “right-handed”. For this reason, it becomes difficult to win a prize at the upper start winning opening 33A. That is, when the effect mode is the “probability change effect mode”, the “small hit” is very unlikely to occur. Therefore, even if an effect that is produced when “small hit” occurs when the effect mode is the “probable effect effect mode”, the effect is rarely generated.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, an effect that is made when “small hit” occurs when the effect mode is “probability change effect mode”, and “2R short time big hit when the effect mode is“ probability change effect mode ”. The effects produced when "" or the like occurs are the same effects (in this embodiment, "time opening corresponding to time reduction", "time reduction corresponding to jackpot effect" and "time reduction corresponding ending effect"). Therefore, unlike the conventional case, there is no need to separately prepare an effect that is produced when the “small hit” occurs when the effect mode is the “probable change effect mode”, and the “small” that does not contribute much to the improvement of game play. It is possible to avoid creating a production corresponding to “winning”. Thereby, it is possible to reduce time and effort required for production of production without causing a decrease in game playability. Further, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and the processing load on the main controller 261 and the sub controller 262 side.

  In addition, if the occurrence frequency of “small hit” in “probability effect mode” is very low, when a win occurs during “probability effect mode” and the effect mode is changed to “short-time effect mode” The probability that the lottery mode is switched to the “low probability mode” is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to easily recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the “high probability mode” to the “low probability mode” (however, in the player, the “high probability” There is a lot of expectation that the “mode” will continue ”).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a “small hit” has occurred in the “probability effect mode”, a “return effect” is performed, and the “short-time effect mode” returns to the “probability effect mode”. It is configured. Here, as described above, the transition from the “probability effect mode” to the “short time effect mode” associated with the occurrence of a hit in the “probability effect mode” usually suddenly gives the player a sense of uplift and expectation. This will give the player a great disappointment that the probability change mode has ended. In the present embodiment, as described above, even when the “small probability” in which the “high probability mode” is maintained, the mode shifts to the “time reduction effect mode”. Although it is configured to be able to play a game with a sense of expectation, the above-mentioned feeling of disappointment will occur greatly for a player who does not know this. However, in the present embodiment, the “return effect” is performed in a state in which the player has such a great disappointment as described above, and the mode returns from the “short time effect mode” to the “probable effect effect mode”. Therefore, the player's mood rises from a state of being disappointed (depressed) to a happy state at a stretch, and can give the player a great joy and uplifting feeling. Thereby, the interest for a player can be improved dramatically. Even in the case of shifting to the “short-time effect mode”, it is possible to give a sufficiently great satisfaction and uplifting feeling to a player who knows that the “high probability mode” can be maintained. In other words, if the transition to the “short-time effect mode” is made, the player will be anxious about “the transition to the low-probability mode”. The sense of anxiety is wiped out, and the player can obtain a great satisfaction and an uplifting feeling that “the high probability mode has been maintained”.

  Furthermore, by providing “2R normal jackpot” that shifts (falls) to “low probability mode” as the hit type, it is possible to further increase the occurrence ratio of “2R probability variable jackpot” that shifts to “high probability mode”. . As a result, the “high probability mode” is more easily given when the jackpot is generated, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the “return processing suggestion effect” can be executed on the decorative symbol display device 42. Therefore, the player has a feeling of disappointment and anxiety by shifting to the “short-time effect mode” in accordance with the hit in the “probability change effect mode”, but by performing the “return processing suggestion effect”, A player who does not know the “return effect” will have a great expectation that the disappointment and anxiety that he / she has held will be reduced, and that some advantageous state will occur. In this state, the “return effect” is performed, and the player can obtain a great satisfaction that “the player's expectation has become a reality” by returning to the “probability change effect mode”. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved. Also, the player who knows the “return effect” can grasp the return to the “probable change effect mode” before the execution of the “return effect”, and the “high probability mode” is maintained (again, the “high probability mode” is maintained). It is possible to obtain a sense of security that “transition to the“ probability mode ”) at an earlier stage. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest for the player. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the “return processing suggestion effect” is performed from the beginning of entering the “short-time effect mode”, the player immediately has a sense of expectation and a sense of security with a feeling of disappointment. For this reason, even if there is a decrease in interest due to disappointment, it can be resolved immediately, and as a result, interest can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the “return processing suggestion effect” is configured to be executed by winning a game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state. Therefore, the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state brings not only the acquisition of the game ball but also the benefit of confirming the execution of the “return processing suggestion effect” after the small hit, for the player The interest can be improved. In addition, for a player, even if a hit occurs in which the production mode shifts from the “probable production mode” to the “short-time production mode” (even if the combination of the prescribed symbols is stopped and displayed), If it is possible to win the game ball to the variable winning device 32, it seems that it is possible to execute the “return processing suggesting effect” and thus return to the “probability changing effect mode”. Therefore, it is possible to play a game such as actively aiming to win a game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the winning state, and the entertainment can be further improved.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) The configuration relating to the upper start winning port 33A and the lower start winning port 33B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the “small hit” is generated only when the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A. In such a case, the “small hit” may be generated, and the “small hit” may be more easily generated. By configuring so that a “small hit” is generated even when a game ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B, the player can play “2R short jackpot” (“2R normal jackpot”) or “ When the “small hit” occurs and the production mode is changed to the “short-time production mode”, it becomes easier to expect that the “high probability mode” is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game hard to get bored and to improve the interest for the player.

  Further, the winning probability of “small hit” may be different between the case where the game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A and the case where the game ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B. For example, the winning probability of “small hit” when a game ball wins the lower start winning opening 33B is made higher than the winning probability of “small hit” when the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33A. It is good. In this case, in the “probability effect mode” in which the game ball is likely to win the lower start winning opening 33B, “2R short time big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) or “small hit” occurs, and the directivity mode is “short time” When shifting to the “production mode”, the probability that this shift is due to “small hits” increases. Therefore, the player can expect more to maintain the “high probability mode”, and can further improve the interest.

  Further, in the case where the winning probability of “small win” is set to be larger due to winning the lower start winning opening 33B than winning due to the upper starting winning opening 33A as described above, for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 85, two start winning ports (upper start winning port 33A and lower start winning port 33B) are juxtaposed in the vertical direction, and the number of holds due to winning of game balls in the upper start winning port 33A is the maximum number. When it becomes, the game ball that has passed between two nails (so-called life nails) located immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A is not the upper starting winning opening 33A but the lower starting winning opening 33B below it. It may be configured to be guided to (see, for example, the following example). As a result, even in the “low support mode” in which it is difficult for a game ball to normally enter the upper start winning opening 33B, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the lower start winning opening 33B, and as a result, “small hit” is more effective. It tends to occur. Therefore, since the effect mode easily shifts to the “latent effect effect mode”, the game is less likely to get tired, and the interest for the player can be improved. In addition, the player can obtain more chances of winning / failing lottery, and can improve the interest. On the other hand, the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33B described above is when the number of holdings due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A is the maximum, and is located immediately above the upper start winning opening 33A. Since this occurs only when the game ball passes through the two nails, the player cannot obtain an excessive number of chances of winning or failing, and the disadvantage on the hall side is sufficiently small.

  In addition, as a structure by which the game ball which passed between the two nails located right above the upper start winning opening 33A is guided to the lower starting winning opening 33B, for example, the following structure can be cited. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, the game ball that extends from directly below the upper start winning opening 33A (hole formed in the game board) and passes through the two nails is moved to the upper start winning opening 33A ( A guide member 37b (portion indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 85) that can be guided to a hole formed in the game board is allowed to appear in and out of the game board. Then, the guide member 37b is sunk when the number of retained balls due to winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A is maximum, so that the game sphere that has passed through the two nails is located where the guide member 37b is sunk. For example, it may be configured to pass through and pass through the electric accessory 37 to the lower start winning opening 33B. In addition, during a period in which the game ball that has passed between the two nails can be guided to the lower start winning opening 33B, from when one game ball is launched until the game ball reaches the upper start winning opening 33A. It may be the same as the average time required for. In this case, the number of holds due to winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A becomes the maximum, and when the player stops the release of the game ball (the number of holds due to winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A is At the maximum, since a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even if a game ball wins the upper start winning opening 33A, the player often stops the launch of the game ball) It is possible to win a prize at the lower start winning opening 33B. In other words, even if winning to the upper start winning opening 33A, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity by the game balls that could not get the lottery opportunity, and for the player, the ball is not used wastefully, Can be suppressed. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot given by winning the game ball to the lower start winning port 33B is more advantageous than the jackpot given by winning the game ball to the upper start winning port 33A (eg, jackpot If the game ball that can be acquired in the state is larger than the expected value), the player actively launches the game ball even after the number of game balls held in the upper start winning opening 33A is maximized. A game that aims to generate an advantageous jackpot is possible, and as a result, the gameability can be further enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, both the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball at the upper start winning port 33A and the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball at the lower start winning port 33B are held. In such a case, the display is preferentially performed with the variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball in the lower start winning opening 33B, and the hold is digested. It is good also as a structure by which a change display is digested according to the winning order of the game ball to the winning opening 33A and the lower start winning opening 33B.

  In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the two start winning ports (upper start winning port 33A and lower start winning port 33B) are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. One or three or more may be provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which arranged the two start winning a prize port side by side. The lower start winning opening 33 </ b> B may be arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the number of winning balls is, for example, 3 when there is a winning game ball in the start winning opening 33A, 33B, and when there is a winning game ball in the variable winning device 32 Although the number is set to 15 or the like, the number of winning balls for each winning opening is not limited to this.

  In the above-described embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type that is given when the game ball is won in the upper start winning opening 33A and the case where the game ball is won in the lower starting winning opening 33B is different in the winning lottery. Is set. Not only this, but the case where the game ball wins the upper start winning port 33A and the case where the game ball wins the lower start winning port 33B, the jackpot type that is awarded when winning in the winning lottery is the same. It may be configured.

  In the embodiment described above, an open lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 37 (lower start winning opening 33B) is opened due to the game ball passing through the through gate 34, and the open lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the “low support mode”, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the electric accessory 37 is open. In the “high support mode”, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the electric accessory 37 is always in an open state without performing an open lottery. It is good also as a structure used as a structure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the electric combination 37 is configured to be displaceable between a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won. A configuration in which the object 37 is displaceable between a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win, and a configuration in which the game ball can win the lower start winning port 33B even in the closed state. It is good.

  (B) The hit type, contents, and the like are not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the support mode given after the jackpot is different depending on the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when “2R normal jackpot” is won in “probability effect mode” or “time saving mode”, “100 times / high support mode” is set as in the case of “2R time jackpot”. Although it is configured to be granted, when “2R normal jackpot” is won in “probability effect mode” or “short-time effect mode”, it is the same as when “2R normal jackpot” is won in other effect modes In addition, the “low support mode” may be switched to prevent the “high support mode” from being given. By comprising in this way, the process which changes the support mode provided based on the difference in presentation mode becomes unnecessary, and the reduction of a processing burden can be aimed at. Note that this configuration is, for example, as shown in FIG. 86, when a negative determination is made in step S206-9-11-18 of the jackpot end setting process (that is, when “2R normal jackpot” is won). By setting to move to step S206-9-11-25 without passing through the process of determining the current “gaming state determination value Xj” (the process of step S206-9-11-24 in FIG. 29). realizable.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the various jackpots are ended, the “high support mode” is given while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform the variable display a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. However, the duration of the “high support mode” is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the duration of the “high support mode” may be different depending on the jackpot type.

  In the above embodiment, when the “short opening” of the variable winning device 32 is performed a plurality of times (twice), such as “2R normal jackpot” or “2R short jackpot”, one of those “short opening” is being performed. When three game balls are won in the variable prize winning device 32, the “short opening” is configured to end. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning apparatus 32 is variable in two “short opening”. When the total number of game balls won in the winning device 32 reaches 10, the jackpot state may end.

  In the above embodiment, if the maximum number of winning prizes (specified number K1) to the variable prize winning device 32 per one opening / closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening / closing plate 32b is “long opening”, “10”. "," Short open "is set to" 3 ". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other numbers may be set as the maximum number of winning prizes. In addition, the maximum number of winning prizes of both “long opening” and “short opening” is set to “8”, for example, and the opening type (difference in operating mode of the opening / closing member related to one opening / closing operation) Regardless, the maximum number of winning prizes may be set to the same number.

  In the above embodiment, when the winning of “8R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot” is won, the lottery mode is set to “high probability mode” and “high support mode until next time” is given. However, the “high support mode” does not necessarily have to be given. For example, the “high support mode” is given only while the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times). Also good. Further, the number of fluctuations given to the “high support mode” may be different depending on the type of jackpot. Further, when the grant period of the “high support mode” ends, the lottery mode may be changed to the “low probability mode”, or the “high probability mode” may be maintained as it is. May be.

  (C) The opening mode (opening / closing pattern) of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, the one-time opening mode (opening time) of the opening / closing plate 32b is not limited to the two types of “long opening” and “short opening” in the above embodiment. For example, it may be configured to have three or more types of opening modes, such as including “medium opening” having a shorter opening time than “long opening” and longer opening time than “short opening”.

  In the above embodiment, the opening time (specified time) of “short opening” is set to “0.4 seconds”, which is shorter than the firing period “0.6 seconds” of the launching device 60, but “short opening”. The opening time is not limited to this, and may be set to a time longer than the firing period “0.6 seconds” of the launching device 60, for example. However, if it is too long, the number of winnings will be too large, so it is preferable to set it to about 1.8 seconds or less, which is about three times the firing period “0.6 seconds”.

  In addition, the number of executions of “short opening” at the time of occurrence of “2R normal big hit”, “2R short hit big hit”, etc. is not limited to “twice” in the above embodiment. For example, a relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds) “short opening” may be performed only once. Further, the maximum possible number M1 of game balls for the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state may be variously changed. In general, in the small hit state, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 32 is set to 1.8 seconds or less, and the maximum possible winning number M1 of the variable winning device 32 is set to 10 in total.

  Also, if you win “Small Bonus” in the “Probability Variation Mode”, the opening time will be relatively longer and the number of times you will open will be relatively higher than if you win “Small Bonus” in other production modes. Or the like, it may be configured to make it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning device 32. In this case, the “return processing suggesting effect” by winning the game ball to the variable winning device 32 is more easily performed, and the player can more easily obtain a sense of security of returning to the “probability changing effect mode”.

  Furthermore, the configuration of the variable winning device 32 is not limited to that of the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in a state where the opening time of the variable winning device 32 is relatively short, such as when a “small win” is won, the configuration of the displacement member in the variable winning device 32 so that the game ball can easily win the variable winning device 32. Various changes may be made. For example, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (c), a plate-like member 32c that can appear and disappear with respect to the game area and whose upper surface is inclined may be used as the displacement member. In this case, not only the game ball that has reached the variable winning device 32 at the moment when the variable winning device 32 is opened, but also when the variable winning device 32 is opened (when the plate-like member 32c is sunk). The game ball riding on the upper surface of the shaped member 32c can also be awarded to the variable winning device 32, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Further, in using such a plate-like member 32c, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (c), a protrusion 32d capable of appearing and retracting with respect to the game area is provided immediately above the upper surface of the plate-like member 32c. It may be provided. And while the projecting portion 32d is sunk in the normal state, the projecting portion 32d is projected and retracted together with the plate-like member 32c only when “small hit” is won in the “probability changing effect mode”. It becomes easier for the game ball to ride on the upper surface of the plate-like member 32c for a longer time, and it is possible to make it easier for the variable winning device 32 to win the game ball. As a result, a “return processing suggestion effect” resulting from the winning of the game ball with respect to the variable winning device 32 is more likely to occur, and the interest for the player can be further enhanced. In addition, in order to exhibit the said action more reliably, the said protrusion 32d is provided in the downstream of the width direction center of the plate-shaped member 32c along the flow direction of the game ball on the upper surface of the plate-shaped member 32c. preferable.

  Of course, the configuration of “long open” is not limited to the above embodiment as in the case of “short open”, and various configurations different from the above embodiment are adopted regarding the open time, the number of winnings, etc. can do.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, during the opening effect in the display part 42a of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42, the opening process of the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) is waited, and the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is performed after the opening effect. However, the opening / closing start timing of the variable winning device 32 is not particularly limited. Therefore, for example, the opening effect is omitted, and the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 32 is started in the big hit / medium effect (small hit / medium effect) following the stoppage of the fluctuation, that is, the variable winning device 32 waits for the opening / closing process. You may comprise so that it may not be carried out.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the “opening counter” is provided to measure the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 (opening / closing plate 32b) in the winning state, but the “opening counter” may be omitted. In this case, the lower byte in the “xx round open command”, the “xx round close command” or the like may be constituted by the value of the “remaining open number counter”, for example.

  (D) In the above embodiment, the opening pattern when “small hit” occurs, the opening pattern when “2R probability variable big hit”, the opening pattern when “2R short hit big hit”, and “2R normal big hit” The opening pattern at the time of occurrence of "is the same opening pattern, but the opening mode may be different. However, in terms of increasing the expectations for winning the “2R probable jackpot” (transition to “high probability mode”) and maintaining the “high probability mode” and improving the interest for the player more effectively, It is preferable to set an open pattern that is indistinguishable between “2R short-range jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R normal jackpot”, and “small jackpot”.

  (E) The configuration on the board surface of the game board 30 is not limited to the above embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, the through gate 34 and the variable winning device 32 are arranged in the right side region of the variable display device unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side region of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the through gate 34 may be disposed in the left side region of the variable display device unit 35, or the variable winning device 32 may be disposed below the start winning ports 33A and 33B. It is good.

  In the above embodiment, the upper start winning opening 33A is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach, but flows down the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. The upper start winning opening 33A may be arranged at a position where the game ball can be reached. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which has arrange | positioned the lower start winning opening 33B in the position where the game ball which flowed down the left side area | region of the variable display apparatus unit 35 cannot reach.

  The through gate 34 is arranged only in the left side region of the variable display device unit 35, and both the start winning ports 33A, 33B and the variable winning device 32 are arranged at positions where the game balls that have passed through the left side region can reach. In this case, the player can advantageously advance the game by performing “left-handed” in any of the “low support mode” and the “high support mode”. Therefore, in this case, it is not necessary to provide the instruction display area W2 in the decorative symbol display device 42, and it is not necessary to indicate the recommended launch direction of the game ball to the player.

  Further, in the configuration in which the through gate 34, the start winning holes 33A, 33B, and the like are arranged as described above, it is easy for a game ball to win the upper start winning hole 33A even in the “high support mode”. Therefore, as in the above-described embodiment, in the configuration in which “small hit” occurs only due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33A, “small hit” is more likely to occur. In other words, even if either “2R hourly big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) or “small hit” occurs in the “probability effect mode” and the transition to the “short time effect mode” is made, "" Therefore, when the player shifts to the “short-time effect mode”, the player can more easily have an expectation that the “high probability mode” is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game hard to get bored and to improve the interest of the player.

  (F) The configurations of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b may be provided at positions that are difficult to see and stand out for the player other than the lower corner of the game area, such as the upper corner of the game area. In addition, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided at positions that are easily visible to the player, and the display unit is relatively large, and the time for which the characters for determination are stopped and displayed is relatively long. You may do it.

  (G) About the display effect in the display part 42a of the decorative design display apparatus 42, a display mode, etc., it is not limited to the said embodiment.

  For example, when jackpot information or jackpot information is stored in any one of the sub-variable hold areas, for example, by setting the hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 to images different from the normal mode. The player may be notified or suggested that a big hit or a small win will occur. Note that the jackpot or jackpot notification may be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a lottery for determining whether or not to jackpot or jackpot is made.

  Further, for example, a configuration may be made in which notification or suggestion of a big hit or a small hit is made by changing the lighting color of the holding lamps 46a and 46b or blinking. Furthermore, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to perform an explicit display indicating the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit, or an suggestive display such as “Adorable”. Further, in addition to or instead of notification or suggestion of big hits or small hits in the decorative symbol display device 42, a configuration in which notification or suggestion by sound or the like using the speaker SP may be used. It is good also as a structure which suggests.

  In addition, regardless of the case where the jackpot information or the jackpot information is stored in the holding area, a production lottery is performed separately, and a pseudo jackpot or jackpot notification or suggestion is performed based on the lottery result Also good. By combining this configuration with the configuration of the above embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of disguising the winning of a big hit or a small win, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  (H) The command transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262 or the like is not limited to the command exemplified above.

  For example, the “ending command” includes the “gaming state determination value Xj”, and the sub-control device 262 that has received the “ending command” is based on the “gaming state determination value Xj” included in the received “ending command”. Then, the display control device 45 may change the effect mode in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, “variation pattern command” and “symbol command” are output from the main control device 261 at the start of variation display, and the “variation pattern command” serves as a variation start command. Therefore, the information corresponding to the “variation pattern command” and the “symbol command” is directly written in the sub execution area. Not limited to this, for example, these commands are output in advance together with a hold control command, etc., stored in advance in a predetermined hold area of the sub-variable hold area, and a change start command is output separately at the start of change display It is good.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it has become the structure which does not output the confirmation command to the effect of carrying out the stop display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 with respect to the sub-control apparatus 262, it is good also as a structure which outputs a confirmation command. In this way, the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are more reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the “symbol command” and “variable pattern command” output at the start of the variable display, the decorative symbol display device 42 again. It is not necessary to add information regarding the stop mode.

  In the above embodiment, the “return command” and the “variation pattern command” include the “gaming state determination value Xj”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other commands include “gaming state determination value”. Xj ”may be included. In a configuration that outputs a command (confirmation command) or the like for confirming the stop at the time of a variable stop, the confirmation command or the like may include a “gaming state determination value Xj”.

  (I) The configuration of various tables such as a variation pattern table is not limited to the above embodiment.

  (J) You may implement as a different type of pachinko machine from the said embodiment. For example, it is implemented as a pachinko machine where the winning support mode (“high support mode” or “low support mode”) is not switched and only the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”) is switched. Also good. Further, instead of or in addition to the payout of the winning ball, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine configured to give points corresponding to the winning ball acquired by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

  In addition to pachinko machines, the present invention can also be implemented as various game machines such as alepatches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated. In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a variable ball display unit is provided which includes a variable display means for confirming and displaying a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed. The thing which is not equipped with is mentioned. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to an operation of an operation lever, for example, due to an operation of a stop button or a predetermined amount As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and the jackpot state that is advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. A large amount of game balls are paid out.

  (K) The configuration relating to “small hit” is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, similarly to the “big hit”, a configuration in which a plurality of types of “small hits” are provided may be adopted. In addition, the variation pattern table selected in the display control processing related to the subsequent variation display may be different depending on the winning small hit type.

  Here, for example, the reach effect is likely to occur, or the variation time of one time becomes longer, for example, the number of variable display executions per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is reduced. A variation pattern table can be selected. When such a variation pattern table is selected, for example, a lot of reach effects are performed, or the variation time of one time is lengthened, so that the player may feel that it may be a “latency mode”. Thus, by enhancing the player's expectation regarding the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, for example, it is difficult for the reach effect to occur, or the variation time for one time is shortened. For example, the number of variable display executions per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42) is increased. A variation pattern table can be selected. When “small hit” occurs, the variable display stops, and accordingly, the number of variable display executions per unit time decreases. On the other hand, when the variation pattern table is selected after the “small hit” is completed, the time required to execute the predetermined number of fluctuation displays is longer than when the “small hit” does not occur. First, the time loss caused by the occurrence of “small hits” can be recovered.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can change the winning probability of "small hit" with the occurrence of "small hit" as a trigger.

  In the above embodiment, when “small hit” is obtained, a special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area of the decorative symbol display device 42, or a combination of prescribed symbols is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. The stop display is configured, but the stop symbol at the time of “small hit” winning is not limited to this. For example, when “small hit” occurs, a configuration in which a special symbol is always stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area, or a combination in which a predetermined symbol combination is always displayed may be employed.

  Moreover, the combination of the specified symbols in the above embodiment is an exemplification, and the symbols displayed as the combination of specified symbols can be changed as appropriate.

  (L) In the above embodiment, the information transmitting unit is configured by the decorative symbol display device 42 that performs the “return effect”, but the information transmitting unit may be configured by a device other than the decorative symbol display device 42. . For example, the speaker SP that informs or suggests the return to the “probability change mode” by voice or the like, or various lamps that inform or suggest the return to the “probability change mode” by light emission may constitute the information transmission means. .

  (M) In the above embodiment, “normal effect mode”, “short-time effect mode”, “latent probability effect mode”, and “probability effect effect mode” are provided as effect modes, but each effect mode has a plurality of effects. It is good also as providing a mode. For example, a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the “short time effect mode”, or a plurality of effect modes may be provided as the “latent effect effect mode”. In addition, when providing a plurality of effect modes in the “short-time effect mode”, when a “small hit” occurs in the “probable effect effect mode”, the specific effect mode of the plurality of effect modes is “probable change”. You may comprise so that it may be easy to select compared with when "2R time big hit" etc. generate | occur | produce in "effect mode".

  (N) The effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42 in the winning state such as “opening effect” in the above embodiment is an example, and the effect to be executed is not particularly limited. Further, for example, the “opening effect” or the like may be one in which a predetermined effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 as in the above embodiment, or in accordance with the display on the decorative symbol display device 42, A predetermined sound effect may be sounded, or a predetermined accessory, lamp, LED, or the like may be activated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the “probability effect mode” is selected as “2R short jackpot” (“2R normal jackpot”) or “small bonus”, the rendering mode from the next change is the same. Has been. However, the production mode from the next change when winning “2R short junior bonus” and the production mode from the next change when winning “small hit” may not be exactly the same. As long as the player does not watch or listen carefully, it may be similar or misleading to the extent that they are recognized as identical. For example, a part of the display image (for example, a display object or a color) is slightly different (may be always different, may be different only at the time of change, or may be different only at a time at the time of change). If there is a difference in the extent that the player recognizes the same production mode unless the player is particularly conscious, such as the timing of the sound effect and the timing of the action, etc. There may be a difference.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the “opening effect”, the “big hit effect” (“small hit effect”), and the “ending effect” are listed as effects performed in the winning state, but all these effects are necessarily performed. There is no need. For example, only the “opening effect” and the “ending effect” may be provided, and the “opening effect” may include the “big hit effect” (“small hit effect”). Note that this configuration can be realized, for example, by setting the sub-control device 262 to perform an “opening effect” between the time when the “opening command” is received and the time when the “ending command” is received.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the sub-control device 262 receives the “xx round opening command” and the “xx round closing command”, the decorative design display device 42 alternately performs the opening effect and the closing effect. As a result, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to produce a jackpot effect. For example, when the “xx round opening command” is received, the following is performed without depending on the presence or absence of the “xx round closing command”. Until the reception of the “xx round opening command”, it is also possible to perform an effect in which the effect during opening and the effect during closing are continued (xx round effect). In addition, when the performance during the jackpot is relatively short, such as “2R probable jackpot” or “2R normal jackpot”, other “xx round opening commands” or “xx round closing commands” are received by receiving the “1 round opening command”. It may be configured to continuously perform the jackpot effect until the “ending command” is received without depending on the presence or absence of “”.

  Further, the execution of the “small hit effect” may be configured in the same manner as described above. For example, when the “xx opening eye command” is received, the opening effect and the closing effect are continued until the next “xx opening eye command” is received regardless of the presence of the “xx closing eye command”. You may comprise so that the produced effect (xx opening eye effect) may be performed. In addition, by receiving “1 open eye command”, the effect of small hits is continuously performed until “ending command” is received regardless of the presence of other “xx open eye command” and “xx closed eye command”. You may comprise so that it may carry out.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when “8R Probable Big Bonus” or “16R Probable Big Bonus” is won, different opening effects are performed in each round. A common effect may be performed as the medium effect, or a common open effect may be performed in all rounds. In this case, it is possible to reduce the effort for creating the production and to reduce the data capacity.

  (O) In the above embodiment, the “return processing suggestion effect” is configured to be executed when one or more game balls win the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state. The number of winning game balls that enable execution of “production” can be changed as appropriate. For example, a lottery may be performed at the time of winning the “small hit”, and the number of winning game balls that can execute the “return processing suggestion effect” may be set for each “small hit”. The set number of winnings may be 0 (that is, the “return processing suggesting effect” is executed even if there is no game ball winning for the variable winning device 32 as a result of the lottery). May be)

  Further, in the above embodiment, the “return processing suggestion effect” is configured to be executable when the game ball wins the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state. However, the execution condition is not limited to this. For example, the “return processing suggestion effect” is always performed regardless of whether or not the game ball is won for the variable winning device 32 [For example, the processing in step S206-14-5-5 (see FIG. 33) is omitted, and “ The return processing suggestion command “is always set” may be configured.

  Further, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the game ball is won with respect to the variable winning device 32, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a “return process suggesting effect” is performed (for example, FIG. 89). As shown in FIG. 5, the process proceeds to step S206-14-5-6 and sets a “return process suggestion command” only when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the process of step S206-14-5-A). May be. Further, the predetermined condition is checked only when the game ball is won in the variable winning device 32 in the “small win” state, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the “return processing suggesting effect” is performed. You may comprise as follows. Further, when either one of the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 in the small hit state and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied, the “return processing suggesting effect” is performed. It may be configured. The predetermined condition includes, for example, whether or not a predetermined counter value (a value such as a winning random number counter C1) is equal to a predetermined value, or the counter value is larger or smaller than the predetermined value. And the like for determining whether or not there is.

  In addition, depending on the game state (for example, the number of consecutive big hits or jackpots (“8R probability change jackpot” or “16R probability change jackpot”) until “small hit” wins, etc.) You may comprise so that the execution conditions of "production" may be changed. In this case, the condition for generating the “return processing suggestion effect” becomes more random, and the interest for the player can be improved.

  Moreover, the aspect of the “return process suggestion effect” in the above embodiment is an example, and the aspect of the “return process suggestion effect” is not limited to that of the above embodiment. As the “return processing suggestion effect”, for example, during the period from “small hit” to “return effect”, an accessory operates at a timing that does not normally operate, a predetermined sound is emitted from the speaker SP, a lamp, You may perform the effect that the operation | movement aspect of light emission means, such as LED, differs from normal time.

  In addition, a variation pattern table (extra small variation) is selected when the “small hit” is won in the “probable variation effect mode” and is different from the variation pattern table selected when the “small hit” is won in the other effect modes. The winning variation pattern table) is prepared, and the special small hit variation pattern table is selected during the period from the change to the “short-time effect mode” until the “return effect” is performed. You may comprise so that a suggestion effect may be made. For example, the variation pattern table for special small hits is likely to generate reach effects, or the variation time per unit time in the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorated symbol display device 42) is increased. It may be a variation pattern table in which the number of display executions is reduced. It is possible to suggest the occurrence of a “return effect” to the player by changing the variation mode from the time of winning such as “2R short junior big hit”, such as easy to reach, and the “probable change effect mode” for the player The expectation of returning to can be further increased.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the “return processing suggestion effect” is configured to be executed from the beginning when the “short-time effect mode” after the small hitting is entered, but the execution timing of the “return effect” can be changed as appropriate. It is. For example, in the “ending effect” after the small hit, a “return processing suggesting effect” such as a character that is not displayed in the normal “ending effect” may be performed. Further, in the small hit effect, a “return process suggesting effect” such as a character that is not displayed in the normal “small hit effect” may be performed. In the case of performing the “return processing suggestion effect” in the “small hit effect”, the “return processing suggestion command” based on the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 cannot be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 90, when the “command” is set to “first open eye command” in the small hit special prize state start process (S206-13-A: YES), the current effect mode is “probable change effect”. Mode ”(that is,“ gaming state determination value xj ”is“ 4 ”) and a predetermined condition is satisfied in lottery or the like (S206-13-B: YES, S206-13-C: YES) In step S206-13-D, a “return processing suggestion command” may be set.

  In addition, for example, the main control device 261 is configured to transmit information related to the execution timing of the “return effect” (the value of the “return counter”) to the sub control device 262, and the sub control device 262 is transmitted. Based on the information, a “return processing suggestion” such as displaying a predetermined character on the display unit 42a after the number of fluctuations until the execution of the “return effect” reaches a predetermined number of times until the “return effect” is executed. You may comprise so that "production" may be performed.

  In addition, for example, from the beginning of the “short-time effect mode” after the small hit or from the time of the “short-time effect mode” to the time when the “return effect” is executed after a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are performed. A predetermined character is displayed only at a predetermined variation time (for example, when the number of variations until the “return effect” reaches a predetermined number) (for example, the character is displayed at a certain variation time). However, the “return processing suggesting effect” may be executed, such as when the character is not displayed during other changes.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, an effect (“Return processing lottery effect”) that excites the player's interest is made, such as determining whether or not the “return processing” is performed by lottery. May be. When the lottery is won in the “return processing lottery effect”, the decorative symbol display device 42 executes “return effect” in which the transition to the “probability changing effect mode” is explicitly shown as shown in FIG. In FIG. 91, the display unit 42a displays a needle that rotates about the center of the display unit 42a as a rotation axis, and a result display region divided into a success region and a failure region along the rotation direction. The “return processing lottery effect” indicates that the lottery is won when the needle stops in the success area, and the lottery is not won when the needle stops in the failure area. FIG. 92 shows an example of an effect when a lottery is being performed, FIG. 93 shows an example of an effect when a winner is won in the lottery of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is a non-winner in the lottery of FIG. The example of the production in the case is shown.

  In addition, during the “short time effect mode” of the “low probability mode”, that is, when the “2R hourly big hit” (“2R normal big hit” is won in the “probable change effect mode”, the “return” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42. In this case, the player may be in the “high probability mode” or “low probability mode” depending on the presence / absence of the “return processing lottery effect” (“return effect mode”). Cannot be distinguished from each other), and the maintenance of the “high probability mode” can be expected, so that the interest can be improved.

  The “return processing lottery effect” can be executed as follows, for example. That is, when the “return processing lottery effect” is executed in the main control device 261, first, as shown in FIG. 95, in the “probable change effect mode”, when “2R shortage big win” is won (step S206-9-). 11-A: YES), the “return counter” is set (step S206-9-11-B), and the “false return flag” is set on (step S206-9-11-C). ) The “false return flag” is state determination information used when determining whether or not to execute the return process (S205-16-8) in FIG. 96 described below. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 96, when the “return flag” or “false return flag” is on in step S205-16-7 of the change end time setting process, the return process (S205-16-8) is performed. Configure to run. In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, when the “return counter” becomes “0” in the return process, the “return process” is performed in step S205-16-8-B or step S205-16-8-D. A command ("return processing lottery effect command") for executing "lottery effect" is set. More specifically, the “return processing lottery effect command” includes information related to the lottery result, and when the “return flag” is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the lottery result is determined as winning. "Return processing lottery effect command" (success command) including information to be set is set (S205-16-8-B). On the other hand, when the “false return flag” is on (S205-16-8-A: NO, S205-16-8-C: YES), the information that the lottery result is not won is included. "Return processing lottery effect command" (failure command) is set (S205-16-8-D). Further, when the “return flag” is on (S205-16-8-A: YES), the setting of the “return effect command” and the “gaming state determination value Xj are set together with the setting of the“ return processing lottery effect command ”. Is set to “4” (the process of setting the effect mode to “probable change effect mode” (S205-16-8-3 to 6) is executed, while the “false return flag” is on (S205— 16-8-C: YES), these processes are not performed, and only the “false return flag” off process (S205-16-8-E) is performed. When “small hit” or “2R short-time big hit” (“2R normal big hit”) occurs in the “probability changing effect mode”, the “return processing lottery effect” can be executed.

  In addition, the “return processing lottery effect” may be executed by performing main processing in the sub-control device 262. Specifically, the main control device 261 is configured to input information related to on / off of the “return flag” and “false return flag” and information related to the value of the “return counter” from the sub-control device 262. Keep it. In addition, when the “return flag” or “false return flag” is on, the “return processing lottery effect command” is set when the input “return counter” value becomes “0”. At the same time, the set command is output to the display control device 45, and the "return processing lottery effect" is executed on the display unit 42a. In setting the “return processing lottery effect command”, when the “return flag” is on, the sub-control device 262 sets a “return processing lottery effect command” including information on winning the lottery result. Then, the display control device 45 that has received this command performs a display indicating that the lottery has been won. On the other hand, when the “false return flag” is on, the sub control device 262 sets a “return processing lottery effect command” including information that the lottery result is not won, and the display control that has received this command. The device 45 will display that the lottery is not won. The sub-control device 262 performs the main process of “return processing lottery effect”, so that the processing load on the main control device 261 can be reduced.

  Further, the “return processing lottery effect” may be performed a plurality of times. In this case, the interest for the player can be further improved. In the state where the “return flag” is on, the “return processing lottery effect” is performed a plurality of times. In the previous “return processing lottery effect”, the winning result is not won. Further, when the “false return flag” is on, the winning result in the “return processing lottery effect” is surely not won.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, a button display BO indicating that the effect button can be pressed during the lottery effect is displayed on the display unit 42a, and the player operates the effect button 125. The lottery result may be displayed so that the player can participate in the lottery.

  Specifically, when “return processing lottery effect” is executed (when “return flag” or “false return flag” is on and the value of “return counter” becomes “0”). The sub-control device 262 turns on a “button flag” for determining whether or not an operation (input) for the effect button 125 can be accepted, and accepts an input reception start timing for the effect button 125. A start timer and a reception stop timer for measuring the reception stop timing of input to the effect button 125 are configured. In addition, in the normal process (steps S704 to S708) of the sub-control device 262, an effect button process that is periodically performed similarly to the other processes is provided. Here, the effect button process will be described with reference to FIG. When the “return process lottery effect” is performed a plurality of times, the process of FIG. 100 corresponds to the last “return process lottery effect”.

  First, in step S771, it is determined whether or not the “button flag” is on. If a negative determination is made in step S771, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S771, the process proceeds to step S772, whether or not the value of the “reception start timer” is 0, that is, the timing at which an input (operation) to the effect button 125 can be accepted. It is determined whether or not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S772, that is, if the input reception timing for the effect button 125 has not yet been reached, the process proceeds to step S773, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the “reception start timer”. On the other hand, if the determination in step S772 is affirmative, that is, if the input reception start timing for the effect button 125 is reached, the process proceeds to step S774.

  In step S774, it is determined whether the “button display flag” is on or off. The “button display flag” is state determination information for determining whether or not a “button display command” described below is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S774, that is, if the “button display command” has already been set, the process proceeds to step S777. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S774, that is, if the “button display command” is not set, the process proceeds to step S775, and the “button display command” is set. The “button display command” is a command that is output to the display control device 45 in order to display the button display BO on the display unit 42a for indicating to the player that the effect button 125 can be pressed. When this “button display command” is output to the display control device 45 in the external output process (S710), the display control device 45 causes the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the button display BO. By this display, the player can grasp that the operation of the effect button 125 is possible.

  In step S776, the “button display flag” is turned on. In subsequent step S777, it is determined whether or not there has been an operation (input) to the effect button 125. If a positive determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S780. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S777, the process proceeds to step S778, and the value of “acceptance stop timer” is decremented by 1, and whether the value of “acceptance stop timer” is 0 in step S779 That is, it is determined whether or not an input reception time for the effect button 125 has elapsed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S779, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S779, the process proceeds to step S780 as in the case where there is an operation on the effect button 125 (S777: YES), and whether or not the “return flag” is on. Determine whether. If an affirmative determination is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S781, and a “return processing lottery effect command” (“success command”) including information on winning the lottery result is set. By outputting this “success command” to the display control device 45 in the external output process, the display control device 45 displays an indication that the lottery has been won on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, FIG. 93). ) Is executed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S780, the process proceeds to step S782, and a “return processing lottery effect command” (“failure command”) including information that the lottery result is not won is set. By outputting this “failure command” to the display control device 45 in the external output process, the display control device 45 displays an indication that the lottery is not won on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, 94) is executed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S781 or step S782, in step S783, the “button display flag” is turned off, and in step S784, the “button flag” is turned off to end the present processing.

  In the above description, information related to the lottery result is configured to be output to the display control device 45 at the time of input to the effect button 125 or when the input reception time has elapsed, but the “return processing lottery effect” is started. The information regarding the lottery result is output to the display control device 45 in advance based on the ON / OFF status of the “return flag” before the input to the effect button 125 and the input reception time, such as the timing of the display. Also good. The display control device 45 responds to the lottery result transmitted in advance by transmitting a predetermined command from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45 when the input to the effect button 125 or the input reception time elapses. You may comprise so that the display to perform may be performed on the display part 42a of the decoration symbol display apparatus 42. FIG.

  In addition, an effect (“suggested lottery effect”) that excites the player's interest may be performed, such as determining whether or not the “return processing suggestion effect” is performed by lottery. When the lottery is won in the “suggestion lottery effect”, a “return processing suggestion effect” (for example, FIG. 84) in which a predetermined character is displayed at the time of change or the like is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, for example, to the player. On the other hand, it is shown that the “return effect” is executed later.

  The “suggestion lottery effect” is, for example, the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 that displays the “suggested lottery effect” before the sub-control device 262 that has received the “return effect command” executes the “return effect”. This can be realized by outputting a command to be executed to the display control device 45. Further, the “suggestion lottery effect” may be configured such that the same effect as the “return processing lottery effect” is performed.

  Furthermore, such a “suggested lottery effect” is performed in the “short-time effect mode” after the “small hit” win, and a stage that is a predetermined number of fluctuations before the “return effect” (return process) occurs. You may go on. For example, when realizing such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 101, first, in the small hit end setting process of step S206-14-5, the initial value setting process of the “return counter” (step S206- 14-5-4), and before the game state notification command setting process (step S206-14-5-9), in step S206-14-5-B, “suggested lottery value MC” Perform the setting process. The “suggested lottery numerical value MC” is a numerical value that defines the execution timing of the “suggested lottery effect”.

  The initial value of the “return counter” set in step S206-14-5-4 is, for example, a numerical value greater than or equal to 2 in the numerical value stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer (value of the jackpot type determination counter C2). A numerical value obtained by adding, etc. is configured so that a certain amount of change display is performed before the “return effect”. This is to ensure a time when the “return processing suggestion effect” can be executed. It should be noted that a predetermined value is set as an initial value of the “return counter”, and a value obtained by subtracting a predetermined value from the initial value of the “return counter” is added to the “suggestion lottery value MC”. You may comprise so that it may be set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 102, in the return process of step S205-16-8, following the “return counter” subtraction process (step S205-16-8-1), in step S205-16-8-F. It is determined whether or not the value of the “return counter” is equal to the “suggested lottery value MC”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the “suggested lottery effect”. Here, when the value of the “return counter” is equal to the “suggested lottery value MC” (S205-16-8-F: YES), the process proceeds to step S205-16-8-G, where “suggested lottery” “Direction command” is set. The set “suggested lottery effect command” is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process, and the sub-control device 262 that has received the “suggested lottery effect command” controls the display control device 45. Thus, the “suggested lottery effect” is executed in the decorative symbol display device 42 before the “return effect”. In this mode, as a result of the “suggested lottery effect”, the lottery is won and the “return process suggesting effect” and, in turn, the “return effect” (return process) is executed, or the lottery is not won. In this case, one of the items indicating the result as if the “return effect suggestion effect” is not performed and the “return effect” (return process) is not performed is displayed.

  Note that whether the winning or non-winning is displayed as the lottery result of the “suggested lottery effect” may be determined by the main control device 261 or the sub-control device 262.

  The determination of the lottery result of the “suggested lottery effect” in the main control device 261 can be realized by the following method, for example. In other words, the “suggested lottery effect command” (success command) for causing the main control device 261 to execute the winning effect on the lottery result in the decorative symbol display device 42 and the lottery result in the decorative symbol display device 42 are not won. At least two types of “suggested lottery effect commands” (failure commands) for executing the effects are stored in advance. Then, by setting one of the success command and the failure command as the “suggested lottery effect command”, determination of the lottery result in the main control device 261 can be realized. Whether to set a success command or a failure command is determined by the on / off status of the “return flag”. The success command can be set only when the “return flag” is on, and only the failure command is set when the “return flag” is off. However, it is not always necessary to set a success command when the “return flag” is on, and a configuration in which a failure command can be set is also possible. In the case of outputting a success command, a “return processing suggestion command” is also output from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and it is displayed that “winning in the lottery result” is displayed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when a failure command is output as the “suggested lottery effect command”, a display indicating that the lottery result is not won is executed, and the “return processing suggestion effect” is not executed. Even if the failure command is output, the “return effect” is executed as long as the “return flag” is on.

  In addition, the determination of the lottery result of the “suggested lottery effect” in the sub-control device 262 can be realized by the following method, for example. That is, in order to cause the sub-control device 262 to execute an effect in which the lottery result is won by the decorative symbol display device 42, the “suggested lottery effect command” (success command) output to the display control device 45, and the lottery result In advance, at least two types of commands, “suggested lottery effect command” (failure command) output to the display control device 45 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to execute an effect that is not won, are stored in advance. . Further, the main control device 261 is configured to receive information related to ON / OFF of the “return flag”. Then, when information indicating that it is the execution timing of the “suggested lottery effect” is input from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 is configured to be able to select the success command or the failure command. Thereby, determination of the lottery result of the “suggested lottery effect” in the sub-control device 262 can be realized. The success command can be selected only when the “return flag” is on, and the failure command is always selected when the “return flag” is off. When the success command is selected, a “return processing suggestion command” is output from the sub-control device 262 to the display control device 45 together with the success command, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the lottery has been won. Subsequently, “return processing suggesting effect” is executed. On the other hand, when the failure command is selected, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays that the lottery is not won.

  Also, in the “suggested lottery effect”, the player may operate the effect button 125.

  Furthermore, the initial value of the “return counter” and information on the on / off state of the “return flag” are output to the sub-control device 262, and when the “return flag” is on in the sub-control device 262. , Based on the initial value of the “return counter”, the “suggested lottery value MC” is determined, and the setting process of the “suggested lottery effect command” corresponding to steps S205-16-8-F, G is performed. May be. In other words, the sub-control device 262, not the main control device 261, may be configured to perform most of the processing related to the “suggested lottery effect”.

  Furthermore, in step S206-14-5-B, a plurality of values may be set in the “suggested lottery value MC” (in the case where a plurality of values are set in the “suggested lottery value MC”, “ The initial value of the “return counter” is a value larger than the number of the “suggested lottery value MC” to be set). In this case, the “suggested lottery effect” is performed a plurality of times, and the interest for the player can be improved.

  In addition, when the “return flag” is on, when the “suggested lottery effect” is performed a plurality of times, the lottery result is won in the last “suggested lottery effect” immediately before the “return effect”. The “suggested lottery effect” may be configured so that the winning result is not won. For example, in the configuration in which the main processing of the “suggested lottery effect” is performed by the main control device 261, the value of the “return counter” is the “suggested lottery value MC” in step S205-16-8-F. Only when it becomes equal to the smallest number, in step S205-16-8-G, it can implement | achieve by setting so that the "suggested lottery effect command" which becomes a lottery result may be set.

  When the lottery result is won in the “suggested lottery effect”, the “suggested lottery value MC” is set to a value exceeding the initial value of the “return counter” in the main control device 261 or the sub-control device 262. Is done. Thus, for example, after the winning result is obtained in the “suggested lottery effect”, the “suggested lottery effect” again before the execution of the “return effect” is stopped.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 103, as a “return processing suggestion effect”, an effect that displays the remaining number of times of change until the “return effect” is performed in order to excite the player's interest (“return process suggestion effect”). The remaining number of times display effect ") may be performed. In FIG. 103, the number of remaining fluctuations until the number “return effect” between “after” and “day” is executed. For example, if “remaining 50 days”, “return effect” Means that the remaining number of fluctuations until “is executed” is 50, and “5 days remaining” means that the remaining number of fluctuations is five. The “return processing remaining number display effect” is, for example, every time a predetermined number of variable displays are performed on the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42 (for example, every five variable displays are performed). The number of fluctuations may be displayed, or the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed so as to decrease one by one for each fluctuation stop.

  The “return processing remaining number display effect” can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, in the variable display setting in step S205-7, it is determined whether the value of the “return counter” is equal to the “remaining number display numerical value” before the process of step S205-7-1. If the value of the “return counter” is equal to the “remaining number display numerical value”, a “return processing remaining number display command” is set. Note that the “return processing remaining number display command” includes the value of the “return counter” when the command is set. The “remaining number display numerical value” is a numerical value for defining the execution timing of the “return processing remaining number display effect”. For example, steps S206-14-5-3 to S206-14-5 in the return processing are performed. In the process between -9, a predetermined numerical value is set. In addition, when executing the “return processing remaining number display effect”, it is preferable to set a relatively large value as the initial value of the “return counter” in order to ensure the execution time of the effect.

  Then, the set “return processing remaining number display command” is output to the sub-control device 262 in the external output processing, and the sub-control device 262 that has received the command displays “return processing remaining number display effect” in the display control device 45. ”Is executed, and the set command is output to the display control device 45. The set command includes information corresponding to the value of “return counter” included in the “return processing remaining number display command”. Thereby, in the display unit 42a of the decorative symbol display device 42, an effect of displaying the value of the “return counter”, that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the “return effect” is performed (“return processing remaining number display effect”). ) Can be performed. For example, when 5 and 10 are set as the “remaining number display numerical value”, “10” is displayed as the remaining number of changes in the change display 10 before the “return effect” is performed, In the change display five times before the “return effect” is performed, the “return processing remaining number display effect” that displays “5” as the remaining change number can be executed. For example, when 1, 2 and 3 are set as the “remaining number display effect”, the change display is performed three times before, two times before and one time before the “return effect” is performed. It is possible to execute a “return processing remaining number display effect” that displays “3”, “2”, and “1” as the remaining number of fluctuations.

  Further, when executing the “return processing remaining number display effect”, the sub control device 262 may mainly be configured to perform the processing. For example, information on ON / OFF of the “return flag” and the initial value of the “return counter” are output from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262. Then, when the “return flag” is on, the sub control device 262 sets the “remaining number display numerical value” based on the initial value of the “return counter”. Further, every time the “variation pattern command” is input, 1 is subtracted from the initial value of the “return counter”, and when the numerical value obtained by the subtraction is equal to the “remaining number display numerical value” A command for executing the “return processing remaining number display effect” is set, and the set command is output to the display control device 45. Accordingly, the “return processing remaining number display effect” can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 42 while the sub-control device 262 performs the main processing.

  The various “return processing suggesting effects” described above may be combined as appropriate.

  Further, the “return processing remaining number display effect” is not limited to that executed in the decorative symbol display device 42, but is executed by a plurality of light emitting means including LEDs provided around the decorative symbol display device 42, speakers SP, and the like. May be. In the case of using the light emitting means, for example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the “return effect” is executed reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance, the plurality of light emitting means are turned on and each time the fluctuation stops. The light emitting means may be turned off by a predetermined number (for example, one by one), and all the light emitting means may be turned off immediately before the “return effect”. Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the “return effect” is executed reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance, the plurality of light emitting means are turned off, and each time the fluctuation stops, the light emitting means is turned on by a predetermined number. It may be configured to turn on (for example, one by one) and turn on all the light emitting means immediately before the “return effect”. Furthermore, when the speaker SP is used, for example, the fluctuation occurs from when the remaining number of fluctuations until the “return effect” is executed reaches a predetermined number of times set in advance until immediately before the “return effect”. You may comprise so that the audio | voice etc. which show the frequency | count of the remaining fluctuation | variation until the "return effect" is performed from the speaker SP at the time of a start or a fluctuation stop may be emitted. The various effects exemplified as the “return processing remaining number display effect” may be combined as appropriate.

  The “return processing lottery effect” is not limited to the above-described effects. For example, the decorative symbol display area 42 and a light emitting means such as an LED provided in a ring around the decorative symbol display area 42 are cooperated. It is good also as performing by making it work. For example, as shown in FIG. 104, items (for example, success, failure, etc.) corresponding to the lottery results are displayed in a circular pattern in the decorative symbol display area 42. Then, by adjusting the lighting / light-off timing of the light emitting means provided around the decorative symbol display area 42, an effect as if the light is moving around the decorative symbol display area 42 is performed. Next, the movement of the light is finally stopped, and the lottery result is determined by the position of the stopped light (for example, the position located on the virtual line connecting the center of the decorative design display area 42 and the stopped light). You may comprise so that an item may show a lottery result. In this case, an effect using a wide range of the game area is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player. Note that both the “return process lottery effect” using the decorative symbol display area 42 and the light emitting means and the “return process lottery effect” (see FIG. 89) using the decorative symbol display area 42 described above are executed. You may comprise. In this case, the execution probabilities of the former “return processing lottery effect” and the latter “return processing lottery effect” may be different depending on the lottery mode. For example, when the lottery mode is the “high probability mode” (when the “return effect” is executed), the former “return processing lottery effect” is more likely to be executed than when the lottery mode is the “low probability mode”. You may comprise. In this case, when the former “return processing lottery effect” (that is, “return processing lottery effect” using a larger area) is made, the “return effect” is not performed for the player. It is possible to have a strong sense of expectation that there is no such thing, and to improve the interest for the player.

  (P) In the above embodiment, when a “small hit” occurs in the “probability changing effect mode” and the return effect is executed, the value of the “support number counter” is not reset, and the sub control device 262 The dummy symbol display device 42 is configured to display dummy information as if it corresponds to the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is given. On the other hand, when “small hit” occurs in the “probability changing effect mode” and the “return effect” is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 105, step S206-14-5 of the small hit end setting process is performed. In -C, as shown in FIG. 106, the return effect is set while the “support counter” is set to the same value (100 in this example) as the value that is set when “2R junior bonus” occurs. That is set when “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” occurs in the counter value of the “support count counter” at the stage where the process is executed (in step S205-16-8-H) It is also possible to reset the same value (for example, “99999” corresponding to 99999 fluctuation displays). In this case, by transmitting a “support number counter” to the sub-control device 262, the remaining number of fluctuations to which the “high support mode” is assigned is displayed using the value of the “support number counter”. It can be displayed on the device 42. Accordingly, information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations to which “high support mode” is displayed when “2R short junior big hit” occurs and the remaining “high support mode” to be displayed when “small hit” occurs The information corresponding to the number of fluctuations (dummy information) can be acquired from a common “support number counter”. This eliminates the need for processing for obtaining the dummy information in the sub-control device 262, thereby reducing the processing load and data capacity. When resetting the “support count counter”, the value of the “return counter”, that is, the number of fluctuations from when “small hit” occurs until “return effect” is performed is “2R”. It is preferable that the value be smaller than the value (100 times) of the “support number counter” that is set when the “time and big hit” occurs. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the change to the “low support mode” before the “return effect”, and the game value (“high probability mode”) given after the occurrence of the “small hit” And “until next time / high support mode”).

  (Q) In the above embodiment, the stage displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 in the “probability changing effect mode”, the “short time effect mode”, etc. is one type, but a plurality of stages are provided for each effect mode. May be prepared, and one of a plurality of stages may be selected and displayed in each production mode. The selection of the stage may be performed by the main control device 261 or the sub control device 262.

  (R) In the above embodiment, the “variation pattern command” output from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262 includes, for example, information related to the effect mode at the time of variation display (normal reach and Super-reach etc.) is included, but the “variation pattern command” is configured to include only information regarding the variation type (for example, hit or miss information) and variation time, and the sub-control device 262 inputs Based on the “fluctuation pattern command” that has been made, it is also possible to determine an effect mode for the variable display. This is because, for example, a table stored for the production mode corresponding to each “variation pattern command” is prepared in advance in the sub-control device 262, and “variation pattern command” is input to the sub-control device 262. In addition, the sub-control device 262 is configured to select a table corresponding to the input “variation pattern command” from the table, and to select / determine an effect mode from the selected table. It is feasible.

  (S) In the above embodiment, various processes executed by the main control device 261 may be executed by the sub control device 262. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the “gaming state determination value Xj”, “return effect command”, and the like are set by the main control device 261, but the “gaming state determination value Xj” is set by the sub-control device 262. Or “return effect command” or the like may be set.

  Hereinafter, the technical idea that is not described in the claims and that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described together with the effects thereof.

Means 1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning / losing lottery with a first winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
A second lottery means for performing a second winning / losing lottery with a second winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
First special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched between at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means;
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A second special gaming state generating means for generating a second special gaming state that is not advantageous over the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the predetermined display means to various modes;
An effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means,
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, the gaming machine in which the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means includes:
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode that is set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. Production mode to be set when
Can be set to the same one.

  When there are a plurality of “first special game states”, the “second special game state” is less advantageous than the first special game state that is most advantageous to the player. For example, in the above embodiment, the jackpot states corresponding to the “first special gaming state” are “16R probability variation jackpot”, “8R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot”, “2R short time jackpot” and “2R normal jackpot” However, the “second special gaming state” (the small hit state in the above embodiment) is more advantageous than the “16R probability variable big hit”, which is the most advantageous big hit state for the player among the respective big hit states. Anything that doesn't exist.

  Also, “same” means that when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the rendering mode that is set when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode is set to the specific mode. The winning mode is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the effect mode set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means is exactly the same This includes not only the case where there is a slight difference between the two production modes, but also cases where the two production modes are similar or misleading to the extent that the player cannot recognize them unless they are particularly aware of the difference.

  In recent years, there is a gaming machine that generates a second special game state (so-called jackpot) separately from the first special game state (so-called jackpot). For example, a small hit is provided for the purpose of increasing the number of game balls (held balls) possessed by a player. When a small hit occurs, it is less advantageous than the big hit state, but there is a slightly advantageous state for the player. Occur. In addition, after the small hit state, the previous big hit probability is maintained.

  By the way, a small hit state may occur in a specific mode (so-called high probability mode). The occurrence of such a small hit state is a high probability mode, and may be meaningless for a player who is more likely to generate a big hit state that is more advantageous than the small hit state. Further, the occurrence of such a small hit state may reduce the interest for the player.

  In this regard, according to the above means 1, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and the winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, When the mode is switched to the normal mode, the subsequent production mode can be set to the same one. Here, since the first winning probability is high in the specific mode, the player in the specific mode usually plays a game while having a great expectation for the next hit. On the other hand, winning in the first winning / losing lottery in the specific mode may result in switching from the specific mode in the lottery mode to the normal mode with a low probability of winning. Normally, the player's sense of expectation, etc., is suddenly lost, giving the player a great disappointment that “the specific mode has ended”. In view of this point, the means 1 wins the second winner / lottery lottery in the specific mode and wins the first winner / lottery lottery in the specific mode even if the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode. Even when the mode is switched to the normal mode, the production mode is the same. In other words, the specific mode may be maintained even if the winning / losing lottery is won in the specific mode and the effect mode is switched. For the player, since the same production mode is selected after winning, the second winning / losing lottery is won, and whether the lottery mode is maintained in the specific mode, the first winning / losing lottery is won, and the lottery mode is normally set. It becomes difficult to determine whether the mode has been switched. Therefore, for the player, the disappointment that the mode has been shifted to the normal mode is relatively reduced, and the game can be performed with a sufficient expectation that the specific mode may still be maintained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

  The starting ball entry means is a ball entry means through which a game ball can pass, such as a through gate (after the game ball that has entered the ball is detected by a predetermined detection means, the game ball returns to the game area again. The ball entry means configured as described above is also included.

Mean 2. When a winning result is obtained by at least one of the two winning / no-lot lotteries, an ending effect indicating an effect mode of the display means after the first special game state or the second special game state is performed is performed.
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The ending effect performed by the display means when set, and
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the ending effect performed on the display means can be set to be the same when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery. The gaming machine according to means 1 characterized by the above.

  According to the above means 2, in the specific mode, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and when the winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery and the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode, the ending effect is obtained. Can be set to the same. Therefore, it becomes more difficult for the player to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or whether the player has shifted to the normal mode. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest for the player.

  In addition, although it is common to individually prepare an ending effect that is performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery in the specific mode, it takes time to create the effect. On the other hand, the degree of improvement in game play brought about by this ending effect is not so high. Therefore, considering the degree of improvement in game play, it is not preferable to spend effort on creating the ending effect.

  In this regard, according to the above-described means 2, it is not necessary to separately prepare an ending effect that is performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery in the specific mode, and an effect that does not greatly contribute to the improvement of the gameability is created. Can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to reduce time and effort required for production of production without causing a decrease in game playability. In addition, on the gaming machine side, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and processing load.

  In addition, the effect by the said means 2 is more effective in the structure where it is hard to obtain a winning result by the second winning / losing lottery in the specific mode.

Means 3. When the winning result is obtained by at least one of the two winning / no-win lotteries, the display means produces an effect during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the first special gaming state is occurring;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the second special gaming state is occurring. The gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, characterized in that it can be set to the same one.

  The “effect” in the means 3 includes the “ending effect” in the means 2, and the “opening effect”, the “big hit effect” (“small hit effect”) and the “ending” in the above embodiment. Corresponding to "Direction".

  According to the means 3, the winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery in the specific mode, and the effect executed by the display means while in the first special gaming state, and the second winning / losing lottery in the specific mode. The winning result is obtained, and the effect executed by the display means during the second special gaming state can be set to the same one. Therefore, the player becomes more difficult to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode has been entered, and the player can be further improved in interest.

  Furthermore, according to the means 3, it is not necessary to individually prepare an effect that is performed when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery in the specific mode, and it is possible to further reduce the labor required for creating the effect. Further, on the gaming machine side, it is possible to further reduce the data capacity and processing load.

  Means 4. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a lottery result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and after the rendering mode in the display means is the same, the lottery by the first lottery means When the number of times (that is, the number of fluctuations) is equal to or greater than a prescribed number, the information transmission means is provided that issues information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to the player. A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.

  More specifically, the phrase “the display mode in the display means is the same” means that the display mode in the display means is determined by the first winning / losing lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode. It means that the winning result is obtained and the same mode as the effect mode set when the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. The specified number of times includes zero.

  According to the means 4, it is indicated that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode by the information transmitting means in a state where it is difficult to determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the mode has been shifted to the normal mode. . Here, according to the means 1, even when the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode, the specific mode may be maintained, and when the effect mode is switched and set in the specific mode. However, it is possible to play a game with a sufficient expectation, but for a player who does not know this, a great disappointment is caused by switching the effect mode. However, according to the means 4, it is indicated that the information transmission means is performed and the player is maintained in the specific mode in a state where the player has such a great disappointment. Therefore, the player's mood rises from a disappointing state to a happy state at a stretch, and the player can obtain a great joy and satisfaction. Thereby, the interest for a player can be improved dramatically.

  Further, even when the effect mode is switched and set, a sufficiently large satisfaction can be felt even for a player who knows that the specific mode can be maintained. In other words, if the setting of the production mode is changed due to the winning in the specific mode, the player will be anxious about “there is a transition to the normal mode”, but it is specified by the information transmission means. By indicating that the mode is maintained, the above-mentioned anxiety is eliminated, and the player can obtain a great satisfaction such as “specification was maintained”.

Means 5. The prescribed number of times is set based on a counter whose numerical value varies,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the counter is used for processing other than the setting of the prescribed number of times.

  According to the means 5, the prescribed number of times can be varied, and the information transmission timing by the information transmission means can be set at various timings. As a result, interest for the player can be further enhanced.

  Further, the counter is configured to be used both for setting a predetermined number of times and for other processing. Therefore, complication of the apparatus and control processing can be suppressed.

  Means 6. Before the information is transmitted to the player by the information transmission means, the information transmission means transmits the information to the player before the information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode is issued. The gaming machine according to the means 4 or 5, further comprising a second information transmitting means capable of suggesting.

  According to the means 6, before the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means, the second information transmitting means suggests the transmission of the information by the information transmitting means. Accordingly, the player is disappointed or uneasy because the effect mode is switched and set in accordance with the winning in the specific mode, but the information of the above means 4 is indicated by the information suggested by the second information transmitting means. A player who does not know the means of transmission will have a great expectation that his / her feeling of disappointment and anxiety will be alleviated and that some kind of advantageous situation will occur. In that state, the information is transmitted by the information transmitting means of the means 4 and the fact that the specific mode is maintained indicates that the player has said that his / her expectation has become a reality. Great satisfaction can be obtained. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

  Further, it is possible for a player who knows the information transmission means of the above means 4 to know that the specific mode is maintained before the information is transmitted by the information transmission means, and to feel secure that the specific mode is maintained. Can be obtained earlier. For this reason, even if there is a decrease in interest due to anxiety that “it may have shifted to the normal mode”, it can be eliminated at an early stage, and the interest for the player can be further improved.

Mean 7 It has a displacement member that can be displaced between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a winning result can be obtained in the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery lottery. Specific displacement means that the displacement member is in an open state when
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and when the displaceable member is in the open state, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. 7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein if there is, the second information transmission means can suggest the transmission of the information by the information transmission means.

  According to the above means 7, the player can enter not only the game ball paid out by the entry but also the second information by the entry of the game ball to the specific entry means when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / notifying lottery. It is also possible to obtain suggestions from the sending means (material for determining whether the lottery mode is the specific mode). Accordingly, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

  Moreover, even if the player side wins the winning lottery that can fall into the normal mode, if the game ball can be entered into the specific entry means, the second information transmitting means will suggest, It seems that you can return to a specific mode. Therefore, in the second special game state, it is possible to play a game such as actively aiming for the game ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and it is possible to further improve the interest for the player.

Means 8. The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area,
The second starting ball entry means includes a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter when a predetermined release condition is satisfied. At least one opening and closing member displaceable between
In the normal mode, it can be set to a low entry state where the opening and closing conditions are difficult to be satisfied,
In the specific mode, it can be set to a high entrance state where the opening and closing conditions are more easily established than the low entrance state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein the second winning / failing lottery is performed only by entering a game ball into the first starting ball entering means.

  According to the means 8, since it is easy to enter the both starting entry means when the high entering state is set, the frequency of entering the first starting entry means is relatively reduced. Since the second winning / losing lottery can be generated only by entering the first starting entering means, the winning by the second winning / notifying lottery is made in a high entering state that makes it difficult to enter the first starting entering means. The frequency of occurrence is low. For this reason, when a win occurs during the high pitching state in the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is often switched to the normal mode. Accordingly, it becomes easier for the player to more reliably recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Further, in a gaming machine that is unlikely to be won by the second winning / losing lottery in the high pitched state as in the above means 8, the execution frequency of the effect (ending effect etc.) corresponding to the winning is lower, but the above means 2 or By adopting the means 3, it is not necessary to prepare such an effect with a low execution frequency (such as an ending effect). In other words, it is possible to avoid creating an effect that is executed less frequently and has a lower degree of contribution to the improvement of game playability.

Means 9. The first start ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launch means can reach at least the first area of the game area,
The second starting ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means can reach so as to pass through at least the second area of the game area,
9. The means 8 according to claim 8, wherein the first starting ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball launched by the launching means cannot enter or is difficult to enter so as to pass through the second region. Game machines.

  According to the above-mentioned means 9, in the high-ball entering state where the opening condition of the second starting ball entering means is likely to be established, the game ball is normally passed through the second area with the aim of the second starting ball entering means. Fire. Here, in the means 9, the game ball launched so as to pass through the second region cannot enter or is difficult to enter the first starting entrance means. Therefore, the second winning / losing lottery that can be generated only by entering the first starting entry means is less likely to occur. Therefore, when a win occurs during the high pitching state in the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the lottery mode is more frequently switched to the normal mode. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the lottery mode has shifted from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Further, according to the means 9, although the execution frequency of the effect (ending effect etc.) corresponding to the winning by the second winning / losing lottery in the specific mode is much lower, by adopting the means 2 or means 3, It is not necessary to prepare an effect with a very low execution frequency. In other words, it is possible to avoid the production of an effect that has a very low execution frequency and a lower contribution to the improvement of game playability.

Means 10. First special display means for performing stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the success / failure lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start entry means after performing the variable display;
A second special display means for performing stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the success / failure lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second start ball entry means after performing the variable display;
The lottery result of the success / failure lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and the variable display executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result has already been executed. A first holding means for waiting until the end of the variable display,
The lottery result of the success / failure lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the variable display executed by the second special display means based on the lottery result has already been executed. A second holding means for waiting until the end of the variable display,
In means 8 or 9, wherein when there is a variable display waiting by the first holding means and the second holding means, priority is given to the variable display standby by the second holding means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means 10, when the predetermined release condition is satisfied, it becomes easy to allow more game balls to enter the second starting entry means, and the fluctuation display related to the entry is displayed. Since it can be preferentially digested, it is possible to execute more first lottery lotteries and second lottery lotteries in a shorter period, and to more first special gaming state and second special gaming state in a shorter period of time. It will be easier to win.

  In addition, since the winning lottery associated with entering the second starting entry means is preferentially performed, the winning in the second winning lottery by entering the first starting entry means is less likely to occur. Thereby, when a win occurs during the specific mode and the effect mode is changed, the player can more easily recognize that the lottery mode has been changed from the specific mode to the normal mode.

  Furthermore, according to the means 10, the execution frequency of the performance corresponding to the winning of the second winning / no-win lottery is further reduced. However, by adopting the means 2 or 3, the performance with such a remarkably low execution frequency can be achieved. No need to prepare. In other words, it is possible to avoid the production of an effect that has a very low execution frequency and a lower contribution to the improvement of game playability.

Means 11. The starting ball entering means includes a first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area,
The second starting ball entry means includes a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter when a predetermined release condition is satisfied. At least one opening and closing member displaceable between
In the normal mode, it can be set to a low entry state where the opening and closing conditions are difficult to be satisfied,
In the specific mode, it can be set to a high entrance state where the opening and closing conditions are more easily established than the low entrance state,
The second winning / losing lottery is performed by entering a game ball into the first start ball entering means and entering a game ball into the second start ball entering means. A gaming machine according to any one of 1 to 7.

  According to the above means 11, since the second winning lottery can be generated by entering both start entering means, the occurrence frequency of the winning by the second winning lottery is determined in the specific mode that can be set to the high entering state. Get higher. Therefore, when winning the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery in the specific mode, the probability that the winning is due to the second winning lottery increases, and the probability that the specific mode is maintained increases. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to have a sense of expectation that the specific mode is still maintained. As a result, it is possible to make the game hard to get bored and to improve the interest for the player.

  Means 12. The second winning probability used in the second winning / losing lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting entry means is due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting entry means. The gaming machine according to claim 11, wherein the gaming machine is higher than the second winning probability used in the second winning / losing lottery.

  According to the means 12, when the first winning / losing lottery or the second winning / losing lottery is won in the specific mode, the probability that the winning is due to the second winning / losing lottery is further increased. Therefore, the player can expect more to maintain the specific mode, and can further improve the interest.

Means 13. The production mode setting means includes:
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, an effect mode that is set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the normal mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the specific mode by the mode switching means. Production mode to be set when set,
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 12, characterized in that they can be set to be the same.

  According to the above means 13, in the normal mode, the effect mode set when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery and the winning result by the first winning / losing lottery in which the lottery mode is switched to the specific mode. The production mode set when obtained can be the same. Therefore, the player cannot determine whether the lottery mode is the normal mode or the specific mode (so-called latent mode) according to the effect mode. Thereby, the player can play a game with the expectation whether it is a specific mode, and can aim at the improvement of the interest for a player further.

Means 14. A specific entry means having a displacement member displaceable between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. An opening / closing pattern in the displacement member when set;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member can be set to be the same when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery. A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 13.

  According to the means 14, when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the winning is generated by the second winning / losing lottery, the winning is generated by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode. In this case, not only the rendering mode but also the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member can be made the same. Therefore, the player cannot discriminate whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is shifted according to the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member. As a result, the interest for the player can be further improved.

Means 15. When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, a symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display means;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, when the winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, the symbol that is stopped and displayed on the display means can be set to be the same. A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 14, characterized by:

  According to the means 15, it becomes impossible to determine whether the first winning / losing lottery or the second winning / losing lottery has been won based on the stopped display. Therefore, the player can no longer determine whether the specific mode is maintained or the normal mode is entered, and the player's interest can be further improved.

Means 16. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Due to the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means, the first lottery means for performing the first winning / notifying lottery with the first winning probability, and the entry of the game ball into the starting entry means And a main control means having a second lottery means for performing the second winning / not-lotting with the second winning probability,
Sub-control means for controlling a predetermined display means based on a variation pattern command received from the main control means,
The main control means includes
First special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched between at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means;
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A second special gaming state generating means for generating a second special gaming state that is not advantageous over the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery;
Fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns related to effects performed by the display means;
A fluctuation pattern command output means for selecting one of the fluctuation pattern storage means and outputting a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern to the sub-control means;
The variation pattern command includes mode information relating to the rendering mode in the display means being set when the variation pattern is selected by the variation pattern command output means,
The sub-control means includes
Mode information storage means capable of storing mode information including the variation pattern command input from the main control means;
An effect mode setting means capable of setting an effect mode in the display means in consideration of at least mode information stored in the mode information storage means,
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, the gaming machine in which the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The variation pattern command output means includes:
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, if a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, mode information included in the variation pattern command output after the second special gaming state;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. If set, mode information included in the variation pattern command output after the first special gaming state,
Can be set to the same one.

  According to the means 16, basically the same operational effects as the means 1 can be obtained.

  Further, according to the means 16, the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the winning is obtained in the second winning / losing lottery when the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, and the lottery mode is specified. When the mode is set, winning is obtained in the first winning / losing lottery, and the mode information included in the variation pattern command set when the lottery mode is switched to the normal mode can be set to the same one. Therefore, the sub-control means can perform processing based on the mode information common to both, and simplification of the control processing can be achieved.

Means 17. Trigger ball means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball launched by the launch means can reach so as to pass through the second region;
A third lottery means for performing a third winning / failing lottery (for example, an open lottery) with a third winning probability due to the entry or passing of the game ball to the triggering ball means;
And a third display means for performing stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the third winning or failing lottery after performing the variable display,
When the winning result is obtained by at least the third winning / losing lottery, the release condition is configured to be satisfied,
The second starting entrance means is
When the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, the closed state is switched to the open state, and the opening / closing process for closing is performed a predetermined number of times when a specified time elapses or a specified number of game balls enter. 10. The gaming machine according to means 9, wherein

  Means 18. At least the gaming state can be switched between a low entry state in which the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second starting entry means is relatively low and a relatively high entry state. 18. A gaming machine according to means 17, further comprising an entry state switching means.

  According to the means 18, since the ratio of the open state with respect to the closed state per unit time in the second starting ball entering means increases during the high ball entering state, the second starting ball entering compared with the low ball entering state. The number of winnings to the means increases. Accordingly, it is possible to obtain more lottery opportunities for the first winning / losing lottery and the second winning / losing lottery in a shorter period, and it becomes easier to win more first special gaming states and second special gaming states in a shorter period. In addition, the number of payouts of the overall prize ball inevitably increases in the high pitched state compared to the low pitched state, so the decrease in the number of held balls is relatively small, and the player reduces the number of held balls. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the game for winning the first special game state and the second special game state.

  Means 19. The gaming machine according to means 18, wherein the high pitching state is a state satisfying at least one of the following configurations (1) to (5).

(1) A state in which the fluctuation display time in the third display means is shortened compared with the low entry state. (2) The specified time related to the opening / closing process of the second start entry means is compared with the low entry state. (3) When the winning result is obtained by the third winning / losing lottery, the number of executions of the opening / closing process performed once is (4) State in which the winning probability in the third winning or failing lottery is higher than the winning probability in the low entering state According to the means 19, the high entering state is (1 ) To (4) in any combination [for example, (1), (2), (3), (4), (1) and (2), (1) and (3), (1) and ( 4), (2) and (3), (2) and (4), (3) and (4), (1), (2) and (3) , (1) and (2) and (4), (1) and (3) and (4), (2) and (3) and (4), (1), (2), (3) and ( 4)] can be adopted.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, The game balls are guided and extended along a substantially vertical direction (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface), and each ball entry means (general winning mouth, And a ball game machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of a game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (especially a gaming machine of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). The game value is provided on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper plate or the like) is further provided, taking-in means for taking the game ball from the ball receiving tray, and the ball receiving tray Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 18 ... Handle, 30 ... Game board, 32 ... Variable prize-winning device, 32a ... Large prize opening, 32b ... Opening and closing plate, 33A ... Upper start prize opening, 33B ... Lower start prize opening, 34 ... Through gate, 35 ... variable display unit, 37 ... electric accessory, 37a ... movable blade, 42 ... decorative symbol display device, 43L ... first special display device, 43R ... second special display device, 44 ... hold lamp, 45 ... display control Device 46a ... first hold lamp, 46b ... second hold lamp, 60 ... launch device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub control device, 311 ... payout control device, Xj ... game state determination value.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning / losing lottery with a first winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
A second lottery means for performing a second winning / losing lottery with a second winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
First special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched between at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means;
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A second special gaming state generating means for generating a second special gaming state that is not advantageous over the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery;
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes;
An effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means,
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, the gaming machine in which the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means includes:
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode that is set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. Production mode to be set when
Can be set der to the same thing is,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a lottery result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and after the rendering mode in the display means is the same, the lottery by the first lottery means When the number of times is equal to or greater than the specified number of times, an information transmission means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode is provided to the player,
The gist of the prescribed number of times includes at least a first number and a second number .

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

Claims (5)

A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area where the launched game ball is guided,
A starting pitching means arranged in the gaming area;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning / losing lottery with a first winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
A second lottery means for performing a second winning / losing lottery with a second winning probability due to a game ball entering the starting ball entering means;
First special game state generating means for generating a first special game state advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A mode in which the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state can be switched between at least a normal mode and a specific mode in which the first winning probability is higher than the first winning probability in the normal mode. Switching means;
Mode determination means for determining the type of lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state related to the winning result when a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery;
A second special gaming state generating means for generating a second special gaming state that is not advantageous over the first special gaming state when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery;
Display means capable of variably displaying predetermined identification information;
Effect mode setting means capable of setting the effect mode in the display means to various modes;
An effect control means for controlling the effect on the display means based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means,
With
When a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, the gaming machine in which the first winning probability when the winning result is obtained is maintained as it is,
The production mode setting means includes:
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, an effect mode that is set when a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and the lottery mode after the end of the first special gaming state is switched to the normal mode by the mode switching means. Production mode to be set when
Can be set to the same one. When the winning result is obtained by at least one of the two winning / no-win lotteries, the display means produces an effect during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state,
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the first winning / losing lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the first special gaming state is occurring;
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and an effect executed by the display means while the second special gaming state is occurring. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine can be set to be the same.   When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a lottery result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and after the rendering mode in the display means is the same, the lottery by the first lottery means The information transmitting means for emitting information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode to a player when the number of times becomes equal to or more than a predetermined number. 2. The gaming machine according to 2.   Before the information is transmitted to the player by the information transmission means, the information transmission means transmits the information to the player before the information indicating that the lottery mode is set to the specific mode is issued. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising second information transmitting means capable of suggesting. It has a displacement member that can be displaced between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and a winning result can be obtained in the first winning lottery or the second winning lottery lottery. Specific displacement means that the displacement member is in an open state when
When the lottery mode is set to the specific mode, a winning result is obtained by the second winning / losing lottery, and when the displaceable member is in the open state, the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. 5. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the second information transmission unit can suggest the transmission of the information by the information transmission unit.

Images